JP7846873B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines (ball-type gaming machines) and slot machines (rotary-type gaming machines).

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that display fluctuating identification information (e.g., special symbols), and when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner (e.g., a jackpot manner), they can be controlled to enter a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. In this type of gaming machine, various effects, such as those that suggest the likelihood of being controlled to a special game state, are executed while the identification information is fluctuating (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-000417

The visual effects performed during the display of fluctuating identification information play an important role in enhancing the enjoyment of the game; however, there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

This invention was made in view of the above circumstances, and its objective is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

To solve the aforementioned problems, the present invention employs the following means.

The gaming machine of method 1 is
A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information based on acquired information obtained when predetermined acquisition conditions are met , and can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state in which the aforementioned variable display is made possible to at least a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests the expected value of being controlled to the special game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected level of control over the special game state,
The aforementioned variable display includes a first operation instruction execution means capable of executing a first operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation,
The aforementioned variable display includes a second operation instruction execution means capable of executing a second operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation,
A period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the elapsed time of a predetermined period,
A storage means capable of storing the acquired information as reserved information,
A storage display means capable of displaying a storage display according to the reserved information stored in the storage means,
The system includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that causes the aforementioned memory display to be displayed in a display manner different from the normal one,
The first suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the first suggestive performance in such a way that the execution rate differs depending on whether the period performance is executed or not.
The second suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion performance after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed,
When the first suggestion performance is performed together with the period performance , and the second suggestion performance is performed after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed, the expected value suggested by one of the first or second suggestion performances may be higher than the expected value suggested by the other suggestion performance.
The system is configured such that the proportion of control to the second game state differs depending on whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the first operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display, or whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the second operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display .
When the memory display is displayed in a special display mode as a result of the execution of the specified performance, the period performance is configured to be executable in the variable display based on the held information corresponding to the memory display displayed in the special display mode.
This is the gist of it.

According to the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of gaming.

This is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a rear view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. Figure 3 is an enlarged view of the main display unit, illustrating the various display units included in the gaming machine. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. This table shows the correspondence between the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the jackpot entry point. This table shows the various random numbers acquired by the microcontroller used for game control. (A) is the jackpot determination table, (B) is the jackpot type determination table, (C) is the regular symbol win determination table, and (D) is the regular symbol variation pattern selection table. This is a fluctuation pattern table for non-shortened time states. This is a table of variable patterns for the time-saving mode. This is a flowchart of the main control process. This is a flowchart of the main interrupt handling process. This is a flowchart of the starter sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the process when the ball enters the game. This is a flowchart of the general operation process. This is a flowchart for the normal symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart for the process of determining whether a symbol combination is correct or incorrect. This is a flowchart for the normal pattern random number shifting process. This is a flowchart of the processing during normal symbol variation. This is a flowchart for the process of determining the normal symbols. This is a flowchart for the standard electric mechanism processing. This is a flowchart of the special drawing operation process. This is a flowchart for the special symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart for the process of determining whether a particular illustration is correct or incorrect. This is a flowchart of the variable pattern selection process shown in Figure 2. This is a flowchart of the variable pattern selection process shown in Figure 2. This is a flowchart for the random number shifting process in Special Feature 2. This is a flowchart of the process for determining whether a particular drawing is correct or incorrect. Figure 1 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. Figure 1 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the random number shifting process shown in Figure 1. This is a flowchart of the processing during special symbol changes. This is a flowchart for the process of determining special symbols. This is a flowchart for the special electric bonus mechanism processing (jackpot game). This is a flowchart for the game state setting process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of balls held in reserve. This is a flowchart for power outage monitoring. This is a flowchart of the sub-control main processing. This is a flowchart for receiving interrupt processing. This is a flowchart for handling a 2ms timer interrupt. This is a flowchart for handling a 10ms timer interrupt. This is a flowchart of the received command parsing process. This is a flowchart for the process of initiating the variable animation. This is a flowchart for the pending icon notification process. This is a flowchart for the timer effect processing. This is a flowchart of the notification process at the start of a change. This is a flowchart of the notification process when a reach is achieved. This is a flowchart for the SP development notification process. This is the control instruction and performance determination table. This is the table for determining the pending icon notification. (1) is Timer effect execution determination table A, (2) is Timer effect execution determination table B, (3) is Timer effect execution determination table C, (4) is Timer effect execution pattern determination table, and (5) is Timer effect display pattern determination table. This is Table A for determining the timing of the change's start. This is Table B for determining the timing of the change's start. (1) is the table A for determining the notification when a reach is achieved, (2) is the table B for determining the notification when a reach is achieved, and (3) is the table C for determining the notification when a reach is achieved. (1) is SP development notification determination table A, (2) is SP development notification determination table B, and (3) is SP development notification determination table C. This figure shows an example of how the hold icon is displayed. This is an explanatory diagram showing the sequence of visual effects displayed when an SP Reach animation is executed. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the display when the timer effect starts when the variable effect begins due to the consumption of the timer hold. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the display of the timer effect when the timer effect starts when the first stop symbol stops, as part of the variation effect triggered by the consumption of the timer hold. This is an explanatory diagram showing the sequence of animations displayed when the timer animation starts running in conjunction with the completion of a reach, as part of the variation animation triggered by the consumption of the timer hold. This diagram shows an example of a step-up notification, where (1) is a diagram showing an example of the display of the Step 1 animation image (stage image), (2) is a diagram showing an example of the display of the Step 2 animation image (stage image), and (3) is a diagram showing an example of the display of the Step 3 animation image (stage image). This is a diagram showing an example of a preview with dialogue. This diagram shows an example of a button notification; (1) is a diagram showing an example of the display when an operation instruction image is displayed and the performance button is operated, and (2) is a diagram showing the types of performance images (suggestive images) that are displayed based on the operation of the performance button. The diagram shows examples of notifications when a reach is achieved, with (1) showing an example of the display of the first character notification, (2) showing an example of the display of the second character notification, and (3) showing an example of the display of the group notification. This is an explanatory diagram showing the sequence of visual effects when a title preview is displayed. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the display of effects when the timer effect, the start of the effect, and the announcement when the effect is achieved are executed from the start of the spin to the establishment of a reach. (A) is a diagram showing the non-operational state (standby state) of the movable performance component, and (B) is a diagram showing the operating state of the movable performance component. This diagram shows the configuration of the memory area for performance hold information.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. The following describes an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (a ball-playing game machine) in which the game medium used is a game ball, and the game progresses by launching the game ball towards a game board (game area).

In the following explanation, "front" simply refers to the front side (the side closest to the player) when viewing the gaming machine from the front, and is the side where the player is positioned during gameplay. Similarly, "rear" simply refers to the back side (the side behind the gaming machine) when viewing it from the front. Furthermore, "up," "down," "left," and "right" simply refer to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the gaming machine from the front, for example, the up, down, left, and right sides in Figures 1 and 3.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is a so-called "digital pachinko type" pachinko game machine that displays a special symbol variation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting slot (also called "starting ball entry"). When the special symbol is displayed (stopped) in a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot (jackpot symbol), a jackpot game (special game) that awards the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls) becomes playable. Note that the game in which the special symbol variation is displayed is also called a "symbol variation game" or "variation game."

[Basic configuration of Pachinko game machine 1]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 comprises a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 installed inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is configured to be detachable from the game machine frame 50. Figure 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50.

The gaming machine frame 50 comprises a front frame 51 with a decorative surface, a main frame 52 to which the game board 2 and other components are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment in the hall. The front frame 51, main frame 52, and outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and are each configured to be openable and closable.

The front frame 51 is provided with a launch handle 60 for launching game balls with a launching force corresponding to the player's input (rotation angle), a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 capable of storing game balls and supplying the stored balls to the launching device, and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 capable of storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61.

The front frame 51 is equipped with a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during gameplay and other game-related events, as well as decorative frame lamps 66 that can emit various lights depending on the game situation, and a speaker 67 that can output various sounds depending on the game situation. Either the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, or both, are also referred to as "effect buttons 63".

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with two speakers 67: a left-upper speaker 67L located on the upper left of the front frame 51, and a right-upper speaker 67R located on the upper right of the front frame 51. The pair of left and right speakers 67L and 67R enable the output of stereo sound. Of course, it is also possible to output monaural sound in addition to stereo sound.

The performance button 63 functions as an input means used by the player when making inputs, and also functions as an operating means that the player can operate. The player can use (operate) either the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b depending on the game situation and the type of game performance being executed. For example, if the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b is operated during the execution of a game performance, a predetermined performance corresponding to that operation will be performed. In this embodiment, the first performance button 63a (also referred to as the "first input means" or "first operating means") is provided on the upper surface (top surface) of the upper tray 61 of the front frame 51, and the second performance button 63b (also referred to as the "second input means" or "second operating means") is provided on the left front surface of the lower tray 62.

The first performance button 63a is configured as a movable operating means capable of operating in a predetermined mode. In this embodiment, the operating mode is vibration. The vibration of the first performance button 63a can be achieved, for example, by configuring the first performance button 63a as a performance button unit (performance button device) including an eccentric motor (vibration motor) and driving the eccentric motor. The first performance button 63a, configured to be operable (vibrate) in this way, functions as a movable part for performance (also referred to as the "performance movable part") that is operablely provided on the front side (front component) of the pachinko game machine 1.

Furthermore, the operation mode of the first performance button 63a is not limited to vibration; for example, it may also be upward projection or rotation, and it may be possible to operate it in an operation mode selected from multiple types of operation modes such as vibration, projection, and rotation based on the performance pattern. The second performance button 63b may also be configured to operate in a predetermined operation mode.

Furthermore, the configuration of the performance button 63 is not limited to the embodiment described above. Any method that allows the player to input data is sufficient. For example, it could be a lever-type input means (operating means), a contact-type input means (e.g., retractable type, touch sensor type, etc.) where the player directly contacts the button, or a non-contact type input means (e.g., photoelectric type) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body (e.g., palm) to input data.

The game board 2 has a game area 3 formed by rail members 4, through which game balls launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flow. The game board 2 (game area 3) is visible from the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1 through a window (viewing window) provided in the front frame 51 (see Figure 1).

The game area 3 has multiple game pins 16 protruding from it to guide the game balls, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is designed to prevent game balls, once guided into the game area, from returning to the launching device. The game board 2 is also equipped with decorative surface lamps 5 (see Figure 5) capable of emitting various lights depending on the game situation.

An image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game board 2 (within the game area), having a display screen 7a (display unit) capable of displaying various images (display objects). The image display device 7 is equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD display), and its display screen 7a (display unit) is positioned on the back side of the game board 2 (game area 3) so that it can be viewed from the front through an opening located approximately in the center of the game board 2.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a performance symbol display area 7b (also called the "performance symbol display section") where the performance symbols 8 are displayed. The performance symbols 8 consist of three symbols: the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R. They change in sync with the changing display of the special symbols (described later) and stop in sync with the stopping display of the special symbols. The changing display can be, for example, displayed by scrolling up and down, left and right, or diagonally. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, or any or all of them, are also simply referred to as "performance symbols 8."

The symbol display area 7b consists of three symbol display areas: "left," "center," and "right." The left symbol display area displays the left symbol 8L, the center symbol display area displays the center symbol 8C, and the right symbol display area displays the right symbol 8R. Note that the positions of the left, center, and right symbol display areas do not need to be distinct; the display areas for the left, center, and right symbols may each constitute the entire symbol display area (symbol display area 7b).

In this embodiment, the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of number symbols (identification information type, symbol type) from "1" to "9," and these number symbols are displayed in sequence. Specifically, the variation display of the display symbol 8 is performed by scrolling the display symbols in the order of "1" → "2" ... "8" → "9" (ascending order). Once it reaches "9," it returns to "1," and the scrolling display is repeated until the variation ends (stop display).

In this embodiment, each of the symbols "1" through "9" that constitute the display pattern 8 is imbued with color information, allowing each symbol to be classified by color. Specifically, the odd-numbered symbols "3" and "7" are designated as red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbols"), while the other odd-numbered symbols "1," "5," and "9" are designated as green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"). Furthermore, the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8" are designated as blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "blue symbols").

The combination of left, middle, and right performance symbols displayed (stopped) in the performance symbol display area 7b (stopped display pattern) indicates the result of the variation display of the first special symbol shown on the first special symbol display unit 41a (also called the "first special symbol display unit") and the result of the variation display of the second special symbol shown on the second special symbol display unit 41b (also called the "second special symbol display unit"), that is, the result of the special symbol win/failure judgment (also simply called "win/failure judgment"), which is displayed in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. In this embodiment, the order in which the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being varied are stopped (stopped order) is, in principle, "left → right → middle". That is, the first stopping symbol is the left performance symbol 8L, the second stopping symbol is the right performance symbol 8R, and the third (last) stopping symbol is the middle performance symbol 8C. The first symbol to stop is also called the "first stop symbol," the second symbol to stop is called the "second stop symbol," and the third symbol to stop is also called the "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol."

Here, special symbols are also referred to as "special symbols" or "special identification information," performance symbols are also referred to as "performance identification information," and either or both of the special symbols and performance symbols are referred to as "symbols" or "identification information." The first special symbol is also referred to as "special symbol 1," "first special symbol," "first special identification information," or "first identification information," the second special symbol is also referred to as "special symbol 2," "second special symbol," "second special identification information," or "second identification information," and ordinary symbols are also referred to as "ordinary symbols" or "ordinary identification information."

Furthermore, the term "special identification information display means" also refers to at least one of the following: the first special symbol display unit 41a (described later) that displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol display unit 41b (described later) that displays the second special symbol, and the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) (described later) that controls the display of special symbols. The term "performance identification information display means" also refers to at least one of the following: the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) that displays the performance symbol 8, the sub-control unit 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) (described later) that controls the display of the performance symbol 8, and the image control unit 100 (image control microcomputer 101). Moreover, the term "identification information display means" or "symbol display means" also refers to at least one of the image display device 7, the first special symbol display unit 41a, and the second special symbol display unit 41b, and is also simply referred to as "display means."

The stopping display patterns for the special symbol 8 can be determined as follows. For example, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a jackpot, the special symbol 8 can be stopped and displayed with a three-digit identical symbol sequence such as "222" or "777" (so-called "double digits"). If the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a miss, the special symbol 8 can be stopped and displayed with a symbol sequence such as "637" or "373" where at least one of the three symbols is different from the others (so-called "scattered digits"). A three-digit identical symbol sequence (double digits) is also called a "winning symbol sequence," and a symbol sequence where at least one symbol is different from the others (scattered digits) is also called a "losing symbol sequence." There are multiple types of symbol sequences (stopping display patterns) for both winning and losing symbol sequences. In addition, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a jackpot, the special symbol 8 can be stopped and displayed with a double digit or a stopping display pattern other than a double digit, depending on the type of jackpot.

The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the performance symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather by looking at the performance symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a (performance symbol display area 7b). This game performance using performance symbols 8 can be said to be a performance that informs the player of the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (also called a "notification performance"). A game performance using performance symbols 8 (notification performance) is also called a "performance symbol game performance," and a performance that causes the performance symbols 8 to fluctuate and then stop (confirm display) (i.e., a performance symbol game performance) is also called a "fluctuating performance."

Here, among the results of the special symbol win/loss judgment, a "jackpot" is also called the "specific result" or "first result," and a "loss" is also called the "non-specific result" or "second result." Furthermore, the display pattern (stop display pattern) of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment when it is a "jackpot," and the display pattern (stop display pattern) of the performance symbol 8 corresponding to the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment when it is a "jackpot," are also called the "specific pattern," "specific display result," or "first display result." The display pattern (stop display pattern) of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment when it is a "loss," and the display pattern (stop display pattern) of the performance symbol 8 corresponding to the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment when it is a "loss," are also called the "non-specific pattern," "non-specific display result," or "second display result." Furthermore, the display of special symbols and/or performance symbols that occurs based on the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment being a jackpot is also called a "jackpot variation" or "specific variation," and the display of special symbols and/or performance symbols that occurs based on the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment being a miss is also called a "miss variation" or "non-specific variation."

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying game effects using the aforementioned effect symbols 8 (effect symbol game effects, notification effects, and variation effects), various effects such as jackpot game effects (special game effects) executed in conjunction with jackpot games, and demo effects for when customers are waiting are also displayed. In effect symbol game effects (variation effects), jackpot game effects, and demo effects, various images other than effect symbols, such as numbers, background images, and character images, are also displayed.

Furthermore, during the demo, an unillustrated performance settings screen can be displayed. This screen allows the player to configure settings related to the game machine's performance, such as the volume of sound output from speaker 67, the brightness of display screen 7a, the brightness of illuminated components like panel lamps 5, frame lamps 66, and movable lamps 15, background display, and execution conditions for pre-announcement performances. While the demo performance is running and the machine is waiting for a customer, the player can operate performance buttons or other control devices (e.g., control levers, directional keys, rotary knobs, etc.) to display the performance settings screen on display screen 7a. By operating the performance buttons according to the information on the performance settings screen, the player can then arbitrarily configure various settings related to the performance (so-called "customization"). It is also possible to enable performance customization during variable gameplay or special gameplay (i.e., during gameplay). In this case, the performance settings screen can be displayed on a portion of display screen 7a to avoid interfering with the currently ongoing game (performance), thus enabling customization during gameplay.

The display screen 7a is provided with a judgment symbol display area 7c that displays a judgment symbol 8s, which indicates (notifies) the result of the special symbol win/loss determination, separate from the performance symbol 8 (see Figure 3). In this embodiment, the judgment symbol display area 7c is located in the upper right of the performance symbol display area 7b (upper right of the display screen 7a) (see Figure 3). The size of the judgment symbol display area 7c is smaller than the performance symbol display area 7b, and consequently, the size of the judgment symbol 8s is also smaller than that of the performance symbol 8. The judgment symbol 8s is also called a "small symbol" or "small identification information."

The judgment symbol 8s, like the performance symbol 8, is composed of three symbols: the left judgment symbol 8sL, the middle judgment symbol 8sC, and the right judgment symbol 8sR. Its fluctuation display is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special symbols (described later), and its stop display is synchronized with the stop display of the special symbols. The fluctuation display of the judgment symbol 8s can take various forms, such as scrolling vertically or horizontally, or rotating vertically or horizontally. The term "judgment symbol 8s" is sometimes used to refer to any or all of the left judgment symbol 8sL, middle judgment symbol 8sC, and right judgment symbol 8sR.

In the judgment symbol display area 7c, the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is displayed based on the combination (stop display pattern) of the left, center, and right judgment symbols 8s. In other words, the judgment symbols 8s are displayed in a variable and stopped state based on the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment. In this embodiment, the judgment symbols 8s are displayed in the same stop display pattern (symbol arrangement) as the performance symbol 8 displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b. However, unlike the performance symbol 8, there is no predetermined stop order; the three judgment symbols 8sL, 8sC, and 8sR are configured to start their variable display simultaneously with the start of the special symbol's variable display and to stop simultaneously with the special symbol's stop display.

Furthermore, the stop display patterns for the performance symbol 8 and the judgment symbol 8s may be different. Also, the stop display pattern (winning symbol arrangement) when the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a jackpot may be the same for the performance symbol 8 and the judgment symbol 8s, while the stop display pattern (losing symbol arrangement) when it is a loss may be different for the performance symbol 8 and the judgment symbol 8s. If the stop display pattern (losing symbol arrangement) when it is a loss is different for the performance symbol 8 and the judgment symbol 8s, the losing symbol arrangement for the judgment symbol 8s can be limited to only one type (for example, "246"). This is because players mainly look at the performance symbol 8 to understand the result of the win/loss judgment (win or loss), so there is little need to provide multiple types of losing symbol arrangements for the judgment symbol 8s, similar to the performance symbol 8. Furthermore, considering the probability of a big win, the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment performed during the game (the result of the variable gameplay) is almost always a loss. By limiting the losing symbol arrangement of the judgment symbol 8s to one type, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency and simplify the symbol display control.

The reason for displaying the judgment symbol 8s (providing a judgment symbol display area 7c) is that, for example, during the execution of a variation effect, when effect images that heighten the player's anticipation for a big win, such as the later-described予告演出 (preview effect) or super reach effect, are displayed across almost the entire display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8 may be hidden by these effect images, or the effect symbol 8 may become invisible (erased), making it impossible to see. In other words, even if the effect symbol 8 becomes invisible (not displayed), it is still possible to understand that the special symbol is in a variation display state or has stopped (confirmed stop) through the judgment symbol 8s. Therefore, the judgment symbol 8 is always displayed in game states where variation gameplay (variation display of identification information) is possible (also called the "variation game state").

In this embodiment, the judgment symbol 8s is not distinguished by color like the performance symbol 8, and is displayed in the same color regardless of the number (symbol type). In this embodiment, the color (display color) of the judgment symbol 8s is set to a single color, "gray," which is an intermediate color between white and black. The reason for using a relatively inconspicuous gray (intermediate color) for the judgment symbol 8s is that it does not function as a symbol that the player primarily looks at to grasp the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (i.e., a symbol that informs the player of the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment), but rather as a symbol that mainly indicates the fluctuation status of the special symbol, and therefore does not need to be as conspicuous as the performance symbol 8. Furthermore, by setting the color (display color) of the judgment symbol 8s to a single color, it is possible to improve the efficiency and simplify the symbol display control. However, the judgment symbol 8s may also include color information, similar to the performance symbol 8, and can be color-coded in the same way as the performance symbol 8 or differently.

The display screen 7a is provided with a first performance hold display area 9c (first performance hold display unit) that displays the first performance hold 9a according to the number of first special symbol hold memories described later, and a second performance hold display area 9d (second performance hold display unit) that displays the second performance hold 9b according to the number of second special symbol hold memories described later. In this embodiment, the first performance hold display area 9c and the second performance hold display area 9d are provided below the performance symbol display area 7b (below the display screen 7a) (see Figure 3). Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first and second performance hold memories, the number of first special symbol hold memories displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 43a and the number of second special symbol hold memories displayed on the second special symbol hold indicator 43b can be clearly shown to the player.

Here, the first performance hold 9a displayed in the first performance hold display area 9c is also referred to as the "first hold icon" or "first memory display," and the second performance hold 9b displayed in the second performance hold display area 9d is also referred to as the "second hold icon" or "second memory display." Either one or both of the first performance hold 9a and the second performance hold 9b are also referred to as the "hold icon" or "memory display." Furthermore, the first performance hold display area 9c is also referred to as the "first hold icon display unit," "first memory display unit," or "first memory display means," and the second performance hold display area 9d is also referred to as the "second hold icon display unit," "second memory display unit," or "second memory display means." Either one or both of the first performance hold display area 9c and the second performance hold display area 9d are also referred to as the "hold icon display unit," "memory display unit," or "memory display means."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 3, the display screen 7a is provided with a variable hold display area 9e that displays the performance hold corresponding to the currently displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), i.e., the performance hold corresponding to the consumed special symbol hold (first performance hold 9a or second performance hold 9b) (see Figure 3). In this embodiment, the variable hold display area 9e is provided to the left of the first performance hold display area 9c and the second performance hold display area 9d.

The first performance reserve 9a displayed in the first performance reserve display area 9c corresponds to the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9c, and the second performance reserve 9b displayed in the second performance reserve display area 9d corresponds to the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 2 "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9d. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 "1" begins (the first special symbol reserve is consumed), the first performance reserve 9a corresponding to that reserve (the first performance reserve 9a displayed at the left end of the first performance reserve display area 9c) moves from the first performance reserve display area 9c to the variable reserve display area 9e (it is displayed as moved). Furthermore, when the second special symbol's variation display begins (consumption of the second special symbol's variation) corresponding to the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol 2 "1", the second performance reserve 9b (the second performance reserve 9b displayed at the left end of the second performance reserve display area 9d) corresponding to that reserve moves (is displayed as moved) from the second performance reserve display area 9d to the variation reserve display area 9e. The number of reserved balls is also simply called the "number of reserved balls". Note that when the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol is "0" and a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21), and the variation display of the special symbol begins, a performance reserve (first performance reserve 9a or second performance reserve 9b) is displayed in the variation reserve display area 9e in conjunction with the starting ball entry that triggers the start of the variation display (variation game).

Here, the variable hold display area 9e can also be referred to as the "hold icon display unit," "memory display unit," or "memory display means," and the performance hold displayed in the variable hold display area 9e can also be referred to as the "hold icon" or "memory display." Furthermore, the performance hold displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is also called the "variable memory display," "variable hold icon," or "active hold icon," and the performance hold (hold icon) displayed in the performance hold display areas 9c and 9d, and the performance hold (active hold icon) displayed in the variable hold display area 9e, are collectively referred to as the "memory display" or "hold icon." Additionally, any one or both of the performance hold display areas 9c, 9d, and the variable hold display area 9e, which are capable of displaying performance holds 9a and 9b, are also referred to as the "performance hold display area," "performance hold display unit," or "performance hold display means."

As described above, the display screen 7a (image display device 7), which is capable of displaying various effects and images (these are also called "display items"), is also called the "effect display unit" or "effect display means," and is also simply called the "display unit." Furthermore, game effects using the effect symbols 8 (effect symbol game effects, notification effects, variation effects), jackpot game effects, demo effects, and the later-described予告 effects, which are displayed on the display screen 7a, are also called "display effects."

A center ornament 10 (a so-called "center ornament") is provided near the center of the game board 2 (game area 3), in front of the image display device 7 (display means), surrounding the display screen 7a. The center ornament 10 is made of a molded plastic (resin) and is attached to the surface (front) of the game board 2 as a frame-shaped component (board component) with an open center. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is visible through the central opening of the center ornament 10.

The lower part of the center decorative unit 10 is provided with a stage section 11 having a surface on which game balls can roll, and the left side of the center decorative unit 10 is provided with a hollow warp section 12. The warp section 12 has a warp inlet and a warp outlet, and guides game balls flowing down the game area 3 (left game area 3A) to the stage section 11 by receiving them from the warp inlet and discharging them from the warp outlet. Game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage section 11 have a higher probability of entering the first starting opening 20 (described later) than game balls not guided to the stage section 11. Furthermore, the upper part of the center decorative unit 10 is provided with decorative members 13 shaped like letters or figures, which have LEDs or other illuminated components (game surface lamps 5) that can light up or flash depending on the game state.

A movable performance member 14 (also referred to as the "movable body"), which can operate in a predetermined manner, is provided on the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and to the left of the decorative member 13. As shown in Figure 3, the movable performance member 14 (movable body) in this embodiment is a circular movable body with a sawtooth-shaped outer circumference, and is provided so that it is always visible to the player. Normally (when not in operation), the movable performance member 14 is in a standby position (initial position) on the upper left side (upper left) of the center decorative body 10, and is positioned so as not to overlap the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see Figure 66(A)).

When the conditions for moving the movable performance member 14 from the standby position to the operating position (also called the "operating condition") are met, the movable performance member 14 starts operating and moves from the standby position toward a predetermined operating position. Specifically, the movable performance member 14 moves diagonally downward to the right from the standby position and stops at a position that covers approximately the center of the display screen 7a (operating position) (see Figure 66(B)). When the movable performance member 14 is in the operating position, it is located on the front side of the display screen 7a and covers a part of the display screen 7a (in this embodiment, a part of the performance pattern display area 7b). From this state, when the conditions for moving the movable performance member 14 from the operating position to the standby position (also called the "return condition") are met, the movable performance member 14 starts operating and moves from the operating position toward the standby position. Specifically, the movable performance member 14 moves diagonally upward to the left from the operating position and stops at the standby position in the upper left of the display screen 7a (see Figure 66(A)). Thus, the movable performance member 14 is capable of moving (operating) between the standby position and the operating position (it is displaceable).

The movable performance member 14 (movable body) is equipped with a movable body lamp 15 (also called "movable body illumination") consisting of multiple LEDs, and the movable body lamp 15 can illuminate together with the movable performance or separately. That is, the movable performance member 14 in this embodiment is composed of the movable body lamp 15. Furthermore, when the movable performance member 14 is moved to the operating position (towards the front of the display screen 7a), it can rotate around an axis (not shown) perpendicular to the display screen 7a as its axis of rotation (see Figure 66(B)).

In this embodiment, the animation that activates the movable animation member 14 (also referred to as the "movable animation") can be performed as a pre-announcement animation during the display of the animation symbol 8, or as part of a reach animation. Executing such a movable animation can increase (hype up) the player's anticipation of winning a jackpot. When the termination condition for the movable animation is met, the movable animation member 14 moves (returns) to its original standby position.

Here, the movable performance component 14 corresponds to a so-called "gimmick," and the performance that activates the movable performance component 14 (movable performance) corresponds to a "gimmick performance." The movable performance component 14 (movable body) is also called a "movable part" or "movable performance means." In other words, the movable performance component 14 functions as a movable part for performance (performance movable part).

In this embodiment, one movable performance member 14 is provided on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, but the position and number of movable performance members are not limited to this. For example, a movable performance member may be provided on either the left or right side or both sides of the central opening (display screen 7a) of the center decorative body 10, or a movable performance member may be provided below the central opening (display screen 7a) of the center decorative body 10 (on the stage section 11 side). Alternatively, a movable performance member may be provided on the front frame 51. In this case, there can be two patterns: one in which a movable performance that activates the movable performance member on the game board side (also called the "game board side movable performance" or "first movable performance") is executed, and another in which a movable performance that activates the movable performance member on the frame side (also called the "frame side movable performance" or "second movable performance"). The movable performance member on the game board side is also called the "game board side movable performance member" or "game board side movable body," and the movable performance member on the frame side is also called the "frame side movable performance member" or "frame side movable body." In this way, increasing the variety of movable effects makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in addition to the movable effect component 14, for example, if the effect button 63 vibrates, the effect that activates the effect button 63 (a gimmick effect) can also be called a "movable effect," and the effect button 63 itself can be called a "movable part" or "movable effect means."

Furthermore, the effect of generating (outputting) various sounds (sound effects) from the speaker 67 is also called a sound effect, and the speaker 67 is also called a "sound effect means." In addition, the effect of illuminating the game board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, decorative member 13, movable body lamp 15, etc. is also called a "light effect" or "illumination effect," and the game board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, decorative member 13, movable body lamp 15, etc. are also called "light-emitting parts" or "light-emitting effect means." In addition to the game board lamp 5, etc., for example, if the effect button 63 or launch handle 60 has an LED or other lighting element built in, and when such lighting element lights up or flashes, the effect of illuminating the effect button 63 or launch handle 60 can be called a "light-emitting effect," and the lighting element built into the effect button 63 or launch handle 60 can be called a "light-emitting part" or "light-emitting effect means." The "display effect means," "movable effect means," "sound effect means," and "light-emitting effect means" are collectively called "effect means."

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 (below the stage section 11), a fixed prize entry device 19 is provided, equipped with a non-variable first start opening 20 (also called a "non-variable start opening" or "fixed start opening") that does not change the ease (possibility) of game balls entering the machine. Based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20, random numbers for determining the success or failure of special symbols are acquired. When predetermined conditions are met, a success or failure determination for the first special symbol (first special symbol success or failure determination) is performed, and based on the result of this determination, the display of the first special symbol's movement and its stopping are performed.

Below the first starting opening 20, a variable prize-winning device 22 is provided, which includes a variable second starting opening 21 (also called a "variable starting opening") that changes the ease (possibility) of the game ball entering the machine. The variable prize-winning device 22 (second starting opening 21) is provided as a standard electric prize-winning mechanism.

Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, random numbers for determining whether the special symbol is correct or incorrect are acquired. When predetermined conditions are met, a determination of whether the second special symbol is correct or incorrect (second special symbol correct/incorrect determination) is performed, and based on the result of this determination, the display of the second special symbol's variation is executed and shown.

The variable prize entry device 22 is equipped with a movable member 23, which opens and closes the second start opening 21. This opening and closing operation allows the second start opening 21 to change between a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which the probability of game balls entering is higher than in the first state. In other words, the movable member 23 changes the probability of game balls entering the second start opening 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening and closing operation). This movable member 23 is driven by a second start opening solenoid 24 (see Figure 5). In this embodiment, game balls can only enter the second start opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and cannot enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Note that the second start opening 21 does not necessarily have to be completely impassable when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as it is more difficult for game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state.

To the right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, a large prize winning device 31 is provided, which includes a large prize winning opening 30 (also called a "special ball entry opening" or "variable ball entry opening"). This large prize winning device 31 (large prize winning opening 30) is provided as a special electric mechanism.

The large prize device 31 is equipped with an opening/closing member 32, which opens and closes the large prize opening 30. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a large prize opening solenoid 33 (see Figure 5). The large prize opening 30 allows game balls to enter only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open position. In other words, the large prize device 31 can change between a state where game balls cannot enter (closed state) and a state where game balls can enter (open state) by opening and closing the opening/closing member 32.

The right-hand portion of the game area 3 is provided with a gate 28 (pass-through opening) through which game balls can pass. Based on the passage of game balls through gate 28, random numbers for determining whether a regular symbol wins or losses are generated. When predetermined conditions are met, a regular symbol win/loss determination is performed to determine whether or not to open the second start opening 21. The regular symbols are then displayed in a variable state, and a stop display is generated based on the result of the regular symbol win/loss determination. When a winning regular symbol is displayed as a stop, the second start opening 21 is opened.

The lower part of the game area 3 is provided with multiple general prize entry points 27. The first start entry point 20, the second start entry point 21, the large prize entry point 30, and the general prize entry points 27 are each entry points that trigger the payout of prize balls. When a game ball enters each entry point, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are dispensed to that entry point. For example, the prize balls for the first start entry point 20 are "3," the prize balls for the second start entry point 21 are "1," the prize balls for the large prize entry point 30 are "15," and the prize balls for the general prize entry points 27 are "10."

The game area 3, which has multiple ball entry points (first starting point 20, second starting point 21, large prize entry point 30, general prize entry point 27, and gate 28), can be divided into the left game area 3A (first area) to the left of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area 3B (second area) to the right. Launching the game balls so that they flow down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed play," and launching the game balls so that they flow down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed play."

Of the multiple ball entry points, the first starting point 20 and the left general prize entry point 27 are designed to allow game balls flowing down the left game area 3A of the game area 3 to enter, while the second starting point 21, the large prize entry point 30, the right general prize entry point 27, and the gate 28 are designed to allow game balls flowing down the right game area 3B of the game area 3 to enter. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, at the start of the game, the player is in principle to aim for the ball to enter the first starting point 20 by shooting to the left. On the other hand, when a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the first starting point 20 and the game state changes to a special game state, the player is in principle to aim for the ball to enter the gate 28, the second starting point 21, and the large prize entry point 30 by shooting to the right. The number of starting gates, major prize gates, general prize gates, and gates is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the number of starting gates could be three, major prize gates two, general prize gates four, and gates two; the number of each is arbitrary.

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, a main display unit 40 is provided outside the game area 3 (outside the game area) and in the lower right corner of the game board 2. The main display unit 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable and stopped state, a second special symbol display unit 41b (second special symbol display unit) that displays the second special symbol in a variable and stopped state, a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays the normal symbol in a variable and stopped state, a first special symbol hold display unit 43a that displays the number of stored win/fail judgment information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, a second special symbol hold display unit 43b that displays the number of stored win/fail judgment information (second special symbol hold) related to the second special symbol, and normal The main display unit 40 includes a regular symbol hold indicator 44 that displays the number of reserved regular symbol displays (regular symbol holds) stored in the regular symbol display 42, a round indicator 45 that shows the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the result of the first special symbol win/fail judgment or the second special symbol win/fail judgment is a jackpot, a game status indicator 46 that indicates that the probability variation function is activated, a launch direction indicator 47 that indicates the launch direction of the game ball (whether to shoot left or right), and a win indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol win/fail judgment or the second special symbol win/fail judgment is a win (see Figure 4). These various indicators included in the main display unit 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit 80, which will be described later.

Furthermore, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbols," the first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b may be collectively referred to as "special symbol indicator" or "special symbol display unit," and the first special symbol hold indicator 43a and the second special symbol hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as "special symbol hold indicator" or "special symbol hold display unit."

The special symbol display unit displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable state for a predetermined time, then stops displaying it. The stopped special symbol (stopped symbol) indicates the result of the lottery (special symbol win/loss determination, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is based on the ball entering the first start port 20, and the variable display of the second special symbol is based on the ball entering the second start port 21. The stopped special symbol (stopped symbol) is one of several types of stopped symbols that is selected according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination. If the stopped symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (specific special symbol, specific identification information), that is, if the stopping display pattern of the special symbol (the display result of the special symbol's fluctuation display) is a specific pattern indicating a jackpot (specific display result), the game transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which a jackpot game (special game) is possible, in which the large prize winning slot 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that was stopped and displayed. The opening patterns of the large prize winning slot in a jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol's stop display continues until a predetermined stop display time (confirmation display time) has elapsed. If the displayed special symbol is a losing symbol (losing type, non-specific type) and a special symbol hold is stored at the time of the stop display, the oldest (first) special symbol hold in the storage order is consumed after the stop display time has elapsed, and the display of the next special symbol begins. If the displayed special symbol is a losing symbol and no special symbol hold is stored at the time of the stop display, the special symbol's stop display state is maintained even after the stop display time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the displayed special symbol is a jackpot symbol, after the stop display time has elapsed, the game transitions to the opening period of the jackpot game described later, and after this opening period, the first round of the jackpot game begins.

The display time for special symbols is generally set to "0.5 seconds to 1.0 second," and in this embodiment, it is set to "0.6 seconds." Note that the display time for a losing symbol (non-specific mode) and the display time for a winning symbol (specific mode) may be different. In this case, the winning display time can be made longer than the losing display time, or vice versa. Furthermore, the display time may be varied depending on the game state, such as the low-base state or high-base state described later. The losing display time is also called the "non-specific display time," and the winning display time is also called the "specific display time."

As shown in Figure 4, the first special symbol display unit 41a is composed of eight LEDs labeled "i" to "p", and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol win/loss determination. In this embodiment, seven types of jackpots are provided as a result of the first special symbol win/loss determination: "10R 1st jackpot", "10R 2nd jackpot", "10R 3rd jackpot", "10R 4th jackpot", "10R 5th jackpot", "5R 6th jackpot", and "5R 7th jackpot" (see Figures 6 and 8). The LEDs of the first special symbol display unit 41a are capable of displaying a display mode (specific mode, specific display result) corresponding to each of these seven types of jackpots. For example, if the result of the first special symbol win/loss judgment is a 10R first jackpot, the two "ij" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R first jackpot symbol); if it's a 10R second jackpot, the two "in" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R second jackpot symbol); and if it's a 10R third jackpot, the two "im" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R third jackpot symbol). In this way, various jackpot symbols (specific patterns, specific display results) are displayed by the combination of lighting and turning off the multiple LEDs that make up the first special symbol display unit 41a. Furthermore, if the result of the first special symbol win/loss judgment is a miss, one "p" LED is lit and the rest are turned off (miss symbol).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display unit 41b is composed of eight LEDs labeled "a to h" and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol win/loss determination. In this embodiment, two types of jackpots, "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot," are provided as a result of the second special symbol win/loss determination (see Figures 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the second special symbol display unit 41b can adopt a display mode (specific mode, specific display result) corresponding to each of these two types of jackpots. For example, if the result of the second special symbol win/loss judgment is a 10R 8th jackpot, the three LEDs labeled "abd" are lit and the rest are turned off (10R 8th jackpot symbol). If it's a 10R 9th jackpot, the three LEDs labeled "abg" are lit and the rest are turned off (10R 9th jackpot symbol). Various jackpot symbols (specific patterns, specific display results) are displayed by the combination of lighting and turning off the multiple LEDs that make up the second special symbol display unit 41b. In the case of a loss, one LED labeled "h" is lit and the rest are turned off (loss symbol).

Furthermore, the stopping display patterns for special symbols (stopping symbols) and the types of jackpots (types of rounds, number of jackpots, etc.) are not limited to these and can be set arbitrarily.

Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it is displayed in a variable state for a predetermined period of time. The variable state of the special symbol can be such that, for example, each LED lights up in a predetermined sequence, such as clockwise or counterclockwise, so that the light flows repeatedly. Furthermore, the first special symbol displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display unit 41a maintains that stopped state until the aforementioned stopped state period has elapsed, at which point the next variable state begins. Similarly, the second special symbol displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display unit 41b maintains that stopped state until the aforementioned stopped state period has elapsed, at which point the next variable state begins. If the next variable state does not begin, the stopped state is maintained even after the stopped state period has elapsed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (also called "acquired information"), such as a random number for determining whether a special symbol wins or loses, is acquired based on that entry (acquisition means). The acquired information is then stored as special symbol hold information (also called "hold information") in a special symbol hold storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80 (hold storage means). Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored as the first special symbol hold information (also called the first hold information) in the first special symbol hold storage unit (not shown), and if the ball enters the second start port 21, it is stored as the second special symbol hold information (also called the second hold information) in the second special symbol hold storage unit (not shown). An upper limit is set on the number of special symbol holds (acquired information) that can be stored in each special symbol hold storage unit; in this embodiment, the upper limit is "4" for each.

Here, the "special design retention memory unit" is also referred to as the "acquired information storage means" or "retention memory means," the first special design retention memory unit is also referred to as the "first acquired information storage means" or "first retention memory means," and the second special design retention memory unit is also referred to as the "second acquired information storage means" or "second retention memory means." Furthermore, either the first special design retention memory unit or the second special design retention memory unit, or both, may be referred to as the "special design retention memory unit," "acquired information storage means," or "retention memory means," or simply as the "storage means."

Special symbol holds stored in the special symbol hold memory unit are consumed when the display of special symbol variations based on those special symbol holds begins (executes). In other words, consuming a special symbol hold means determining the random number used for determining the success or failure of the special symbol corresponding to that special symbol hold, and then executing the display of special symbol variations to show the result of that determination. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, even if the display of special symbol variations based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be executed immediately upon entry—that is, even if the display of special symbol variations is in progress or a special game is in progress—it is possible to reserve the right to determine the success or failure of the special symbol for that entry, up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment).

The number of special feature holds stored in the special feature hold memory unit is displayed on the first special feature hold indicator 43a and the second special feature hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special feature hold indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and the number of first special feature holds is displayed by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special feature holds. For example, if the number of reserved items is "0", the display can be set to "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: red light, ▲: green light), with both LEDs off. If the number of reserved items is "1", the display can be set to "u□v●", with the "u" LED off and the "v" LED lit red. If the number of reserved items is "2", the display can be set to "u●v□", with the "u" LED lit red and the "v" LED off. If the number of reserved items is "3", the display can be set to "u●v●", with both LEDs lit red. If the number of reserved items is "4 (the maximum number)", the display can be set to "u▲v▲", with both LEDs lit green.

Furthermore, the second special feature hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs labeled "wx," and displays the number of second special feature holds by controlling the LED display according to the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is "0," the display mode is "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red light on, ▲: green light on), with both LEDs turned off. The display modes for holds "1" to "4" are defined in the same way as the first special feature hold indicator 43a.

Furthermore, similar to the first and second performance hold display areas 9c and 9d described above, the first special feature hold indicator 43a can be referred to as the "first memory display unit" or "first memory display means," the second special feature hold indicator 43b can be referred to as the "second memory display unit" or "second memory display means," and either or both of the first and second special feature hold indicators 43a and 43b can be referred to as the "memory display unit" or "memory display means."

The display of the regular symbols changes when a game ball passes through gate 28. The regular symbol display unit 42 displays the regular symbols in a changing pattern for a predetermined time, then stops them. The stopped regular symbol (stopped symbol) indicates the result of the regular symbol win/loss determination based on the game ball's passage through gate 28. The stopped regular symbol is one of several regular symbols selected by the regular symbol win/loss determination. If the stopped regular symbol is a predetermined specific regular symbol (winning regular symbol), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second start gate 21 in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening patterns of the second start gate 21 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 4, the regular symbol indicator 42 is composed of two LEDs labeled "st," and the way they light up allows the display of a regular symbol corresponding to the result of the regular symbol win/loss judgment. For example, if the judgment result is a win, the winning regular symbol is displayed as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: off), with both LEDs lit. If the judgment result is a loss, a losing regular symbol (non-specific regular symbol) is displayed as "s□t■," with only the "t" LED lit. Before the regular symbol is displayed as stopped, a variable display of the regular symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately light up and turn off. Furthermore, the regular symbol displayed as stopped on the regular symbol indicator 42 maintains that stopped display mode until the stopped display time has elapsed, at which point the next variable display begins. If the next variable display does not begin, the stopped display mode is maintained even after the stopped display time has elapsed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball passes through gate 28, various information (also called "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether a regular symbol is a winning or losing combination is acquired based on that passage. The acquired information is stored as regular symbol hold (hold information) in a regular symbol hold storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set on the number of regular symbol holds that can be stored in the regular symbol hold storage unit, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is "4". Regular symbol holds stored in the regular symbol hold storage unit are consumed when it becomes possible to display the variation of a regular symbol based on that regular symbol hold. Consumption of a regular symbol hold means determining the random number for determining whether a regular symbol is a winning or losing combination corresponding to that regular symbol hold, and executing the display of the variation of a regular symbol to show the result of that determination. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, even if the display of the normal symbols based on the passage of a game ball through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately at the time of passage—that is, even if the display of the normal symbols is being performed or an auxiliary game is being performed—the right to determine whether the normal symbols are correct or incorrect for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number of balls.

The number of reserved general drawings stored in the general drawing reservation memory unit is displayed on the general drawing reservation indicator 44. Specifically, the general drawing reservation indicator 44 consists of two "qr" LEDs, and displays the number of reserved general drawings by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of reserved drawings. For example, if the number of reserved drawings is "0", the display will show "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: red light, ▲: green light), with both LEDs off. If the number of reserved drawings is "1", the display will show "q□r●", with the "q" LED off and the "r" LED lit red. The display for reserved drawings "2" to "4" is also defined in the same way as the first special drawing reservation indicator 43a.

As shown in Figure 4, the round indicator 45 consists of two LEDs: a lamp for 5R and a lamp for 10R. For example, when a 5R jackpot is achieved, the 5R lamp lights up at the time the corresponding jackpot symbols are confirmed. Specifically, the display will look like "5▲10R△" (for example, △: off, ▲: on). Similarly, when a 10R jackpot is achieved, the 10R lamp lights up at the time the corresponding jackpot symbols are confirmed. Specifically, the display will look like "5△10R▲" (for example, △: off, ▲: on).

[Electrical configuration of Pachinko game machine 1]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained based on Figures 2 and 5. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control board (also called the "main control unit" or "game control unit") 80 that controls the progress of the game and the benefits of the game, such as determining whether special symbols are correct or not, determining whether ordinary symbols are correct or not, and transitions in the game state; a sub-control board (also called the "sub-control unit" or "performance control unit") 90 that controls the effects that are executed as the game progresses; an image control board (also called the "image control unit") 100 that controls the display of the image display device 7; an audio control board 106 that controls the output of sound effects from the speaker 67; a lamp control board 107 that controls the driving of the game board lamps 5 and frame lamps 66, etc.; and a payout control board (also called the "payout control unit") 110 that controls the payout of game balls.

As shown in Figure 2, the rear side (back side) of the pachinko game machine 1 has a main control board housing case located approximately in the center, containing the main control board 80. Above the main control board case is a housing case for the sound control board 106, lamp control board 107, and image control board 100. Above the housing case for the image control board is a housing case for the sub-control board 90. Furthermore, a payout control board case containing the payout control board 110 is located to the lower left of the main control board case, and a power supply board case containing the power supply board 109 is located to the right of the payout control board case. The power supply board 109 supplies the power necessary for driving (operating) the various boards and electrical components connected to them in the pachinko game machine 1 (power supply means).

As shown in Figure 5, the main control board 80 is equipped with a one-chip microcontroller for game control (also called the "game control microcontroller") 81, which controls the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcontroller 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) with other boards, etc., via the input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be external. The ROM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) stores various data necessary for controlling the progress of the game, such as tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to the progress of the game, variation patterns for special and regular symbols, and opening patterns for the second start opening 21 and the big prize opening 30. The variation pattern defines the time required from the start to the end of the variation display (variation time), and the content of the effects (variation effects) executed in accordance with the variation time.

The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 includes the aforementioned special symbol hold storage unit (first special symbol hold storage unit and second special symbol hold storage unit) and general symbol hold storage unit. Furthermore, a storage area for various flags and various counting counters is reserved at a predetermined address in the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81).

The main control board 80 is connected to various sensors and solenoids via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the following sensors capable of detecting game balls are connected: the first start-up sensor 20a, the second start-up sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the large prize-winning slot sensor 30a, and the general prize-winning slot sensor 27a.

The first start-up sensor 20a is installed inside the first start-up opening 20 and detects game balls that enter the first start-up opening 20. The second start-up opening sensor 21a is installed inside the second start-up opening 21 and detects game balls that enter the second start-up opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is installed inside the gate 28 and detects game balls that pass through the gate 28. The big prize-winning opening sensor 30a is installed inside the big prize-winning opening 30 and detects game balls that enter the big prize-winning opening 30. The general prize-winning opening sensors 27a are installed inside each general prize-winning opening 27 and detect game balls that enter the general prize-winning opening 27. These sensors capable of detecting game balls are also called "ball detection sensors" or "game ball detection means."

The solenoids connected are the second start port solenoid 24 and the grand prize port solenoid 33. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22. The grand prize port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the grand prize device 31.

In addition to the ball detection sensor, the sensors connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88 include a radio wave sensor 71 capable of detecting radio waves output from a radio wave output device, and a magnetic sensor 72 capable of detecting magnetism emitted from a magnet.

The radio wave sensor 71 detects radio waves when they are emitted from a radio wave output device on the front side of the game board 2. This radio wave sensor 71 is primarily installed to detect fraudulent activities (so-called "radio wave cheating") that cause ball detection sensors to malfunction due to radio waves (illegal radio waves). One or more sensors are installed depending on the number and location of the ball entry points (ball detection sensors) targeted by the radio wave cheating countermeasures, the radio wave detection range (detection performance), etc. Specifically, for example, the radio wave sensor 71 can be installed targeting the first start point 20 (first start point sensor 20a) and the second start point 21 (second start point sensor 21a), which are triggers for determining whether a special symbol wins or loses.

The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 71 (also referred to as the "radio wave detection signal" or "radio wave sensor signal") input to the main control board 80 is, for example, OFF (non-detection state) when the radio wave sensor 71 does not detect radio waves (illegal radio waves), and ON (detection state) when the radio wave sensor 71 detects radio waves (illegal radio waves).

The magnetic sensor 72 detects the magnetism of a magnet when it is brought close to the surface of the window (viewing window) of the front frame 51. This magnetic sensor 72 is primarily installed to detect fraudulent activities (so-called "magnetic cheating") that use magnets to forcibly guide game balls into starting openings, general prize winning openings, specific areas (V-areas), etc. One or more sensors are installed depending on the number and location of the ball winning openings (ball detection sensors) targeted by the magnetic cheating countermeasures, the magnetic detection range (detection performance), etc. Specifically, for example, the magnetic sensor 72 can be installed targeting the first starting opening 20, which triggers the execution of the special symbol win/loss determination, and the general prize winning opening 27, which triggers the payout of prize balls.

The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 72 (also called the "magnetic detection signal" or "magnetic sensor signal") input to the main control board 80 is, for example, OFF (non-detection state) when the magnetic sensor 72 does not detect magnetism, and ON (detection state) when the magnetic sensor 72 detects magnetism.

The radio wave sensor 71 and magnetic sensor 72, which are capable of detecting fraudulent activities such as radio wave cheating and magnetic cheating, are also called "fraud detection sensors" or "fraud detection means." It is also possible to provide a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations applied to the gaming machine as a fraud detection sensor (fraud detection means). The vibration sensor is primarily installed to detect fraudulent activities (so-called "hitting") that involve hitting the gaming machine and applying vibration (impact) to the game board (game area) to direct the game balls towards specific areas (V-areas) that trigger the awarding of game benefits, or lottery areas (e.g., the starting gate) that trigger the lottery related to the awarding of game benefits. Examples of game benefits include transitions to advantageous game states for the player, such as jackpot game states or probability variation game states.

Furthermore, the main control board 80 is connected to the first special symbol indicator 41a, the second special symbol indicator 41b, the regular symbol indicator 42, the first special symbol hold indicator 43a, the second special symbol hold indicator 43b, the regular symbol hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game status indicator 46, the launch direction indicator 47, and the win indicator 48. The display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that dispenses prize balls and loaned balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1, enabling ball lending based on information stored on an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium), etc.). The launch device 112 is also connected via a launch control board (also called a "launch control unit") 111. The launch device 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see Figure 1).

The payout control board 110 has a payout control one-chip microcontroller (also called the "payout control microcontroller") 116 mounted on it, which controls the payout of game balls according to a predetermined program. The payout control microcontroller 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The payout control microcontroller 116, via the input/output circuit 117, drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 to dispense prize balls and loaned balls based on signals from the game control microcontroller 81 and the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko machine 1. The dispensed game balls are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the launch handle 60 of the launch device 112 is operated, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the launch handle 60 by the operator (player), and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60. The launch motor 113 is then driven and controlled to launch game balls with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115. In this embodiment, the launch device 112 can continuously launch approximately 100 game balls per minute through the drive of the launch motor 113.

The payout control board 110 is connected to a frame open detection switch 70 capable of detecting when the front frame 51 is open. The frame open detection switch 70 is also referred to as the "open detection means." The frame open detection switch 70 is, for example, installed on the front frame 51 or the main frame 52, and is configured to switch on or off in response to changes in the front frame 51's state, such as when it changes from a closed state to an open state, or from an open state to a closed state. In other words, the frame open detection switch 70 is also an open/close detection switch that detects the opening and closing of the front frame 51. The open/close detection switch is also referred to as the "open/close detection means." The front frame 51 is opened and closed by an employee of the gaming hall (external operation) when performing maintenance work on the game board 2 or clearing ball jams (so-called "grapes") in the game area 3.

The detection signal (also called the "frame open detection signal") of the frame open detection switch 70, which is input to the dispensing control board 110, is OFF (non-detection state) when the front frame 51 is in a closed state, and ON (detection state) when the front frame 51 is in an open state. That is, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the opening of the front frame 51 (a change from the closed state to the open state of the front frame 51), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 turns ON. Conversely, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the closing of the front frame 51 (a change from the open state to the closed state of the front frame 51), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 turns OFF.

The frame opening detection signal input to the payout control board 110 is input to the main control board 80. In other words, the detection signal from the frame opening detection switch 70 is input to the main control board 80 via the payout control board 110. The game control microcomputer 81 can detect the state (open/closed) of the front frame 51 based on the state of the input frame opening detection signal. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 can detect fraudulent activities such as radio wave cheating and magnetic cheating based on the state of the aforementioned radio wave detection signal and magnetic detection signal input to the main control board 80.

If the front frame 51 opens or fraudulent activity occurs, it becomes difficult (impossible) to play the game normally, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 becomes unsuitable for play. It is possible to detect such an unsuitable state for play (in this embodiment, the state where the front frame 51 is open or fraudulent activity occurs) based on the state of the frame opening detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and magnetic detection signal.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection, allowing only signal transmission from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using diodes) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means of restricting the direction of communication.

As shown in Figure 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a one-chip microcontroller for performance control (also called the "performance control microcontroller") 91 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a predetermined program. The performance control microcontroller 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the performances that occur as the game progresses, a RAM used as work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The microcontroller 91 for performance control transmits and receives data with other boards via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the microcontroller 91, and the ROM may be external. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 (microcontroller 91) stores various data necessary for controlling the game's performance, such as tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to the game's performance, and performance patterns for variable and予告 (preview) performances. Furthermore, a memory area for various flags and various counting counters is reserved at a predetermined address in the RAM (performance control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (microcontroller 91).

The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107, among others. The sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) works in cooperation with the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 to execute various effects such as display effects, sound effects, and lamp effects (lighting effects) using corresponding effect devices and components (effect means). This sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) functions as an effect execution means (also called "effect control means") capable of executing various effects according to the game situation. It can also be considered that at least one of the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 functions together with the sub-control board 90 as an effect execution means (effect control means).

The sub-control board 90 (microcontroller 91 for performance control) controls the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The CPU of the image control board 100's image control one-chip microcontroller (also called the "image control microcontroller") 101 performs the display control of the image display device 7.

The RAM of the image control board 100 is memory for processing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores various image data, specifically still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, including characters, items, shapes, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns, hold patterns, etc.), and background images. The image control microcontroller 101 reads image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcontroller 91. It then executes display control based on the read image data. Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of, or in addition to, the image control one-chip microcontroller 101 of the image control board 100.

The sub-control board 90 (microcontroller 91 for performance control) outputs various sounds from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The sounds output from the speaker 67 can consist of music (BGM), voice, electronic sounds, etc., and the data for these sounds (sound data) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment, the sounds that the pachinko game machine 1 can output (sounds that can be output from the speaker 67) include performance sounds (sound effects), notification sounds, and confirmation sounds.

Sound effects include, for example, the normal variation BGM (normal variation sound) output in conjunction with the variation display of the 8th symbol (variation effect), the reach BGM (reach effect sound) output in conjunction with the reach effect, the symbol stop sound output in conjunction with the stop display of the 8th symbol (temporary stop and/or confirmed stop), the notification sound output in conjunction with the notification effect, the entry sound output in conjunction with the entry of game balls into specific entry points such as the start gate, general entry gate, and jackpot entry gate, and the jackpot BGM (jackpot effect sound) output in conjunction with the jackpot game effect.

The notification sounds include, for example, a frame opening sound that indicates the frame opening detection switch 70 has detected the opening of the front frame 51 (i.e., that the front frame 51 is currently open), a radio wave detection sound that indicates the radio wave sensor 71 has detected a radio wave, a magnetic detection sound that indicates the magnetic sensor 72 has detected a magnetism, a left-hand shooting instruction sound that instructs the player to shoot to the left, and a lower tray full sound that indicates the lower tray 62 is full.

Confirmation sounds include, for example, volume confirmation sounds that indicate (notify) the player the volume level after a volume adjustment operation, or light intensity confirmation sounds that indicate (notify) the light intensity level after a light intensity adjustment operation.

Furthermore, a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in this case, the CPU may be used to perform audio control. Additionally, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and sound data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the image control microcontroller 101 may be used to perform audio control. In this case, sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

The sub-control board 90 (microcontroller 91 for performance control) determines the light emission pattern data (data that determines on/off status, light emission color, etc., also called "lamp data") for the frame lamps 66, panel lamps 5, movable body lamps 15, etc., based on commands received from the main control board 80, from the data stored in ROM, and controls the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamps 66, panel lamps 5, and movable body lamps 15 via the lamp control board 107.

The sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) operates the movable performance member 14 (movable body), which is connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108, based on commands received from the main control board 80. The operation of the movable performance member 14 is performed by an electrical drive source (also called "driving means"), such as a motor (not shown). The microcomputer 91 for performance control determines (selects) data (also called "driving data") for operating the movable performance member 14 in a predetermined operating pattern from a plurality of operating pattern data pre-stored (stored) in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and controls the operation (movable performance) of the movable performance member 14 based on the determined operating pattern data. The movable performance device is configured including the movable performance member 14 and the driving means for operating it.

Furthermore, a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, in which case the CPU may be used to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable performance element 14. In this case, a ROM may also be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data related to the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A position detection sensor 17 capable of detecting the position of the movable performance member 14 is connected to the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment, the position detection sensor 17 includes a standby position detection sensor 17a (also referred to as the "first position detection sensor" or "first position detection means") which detects the position of the movable performance member 14 when it is in a standby position (initial position) (e.g., "ON") and de-detects it when it is not in a standby position (e.g., "OFF"), and an operating position detection sensor 17b (also referred to as the "second position detection sensor" or "second position detection means") which detects the position of the movable performance member 14 when it is in an operating position (e.g., "ON") and de-detects it when it is not in an operating position (e.g., "OFF"). The position detection sensor 17 (standby position detection sensor 17a, operating position detection sensor 17b) is configured, for example, as a photointerrupter equipped with a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit.

The signals indicating the detection status of the standby position detection sensor 17a (also called the "standby position detection signal") and the signals indicating the detection status of the operating position detection sensor 17b (also called the "operating position detection signal") are input to the sub-control board 90. The performance control microcontroller 91 is configured to determine whether the movable performance member 14 is in the standby position or the operating position, that is, to determine the position (state) of the movable performance member 14, and to detect abnormalities in the movable performance member 14, based on the input signals.

For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation (power ON), the standby position detection signal may be OFF (standby position detection sensor 17a is in a non-detection state) when the movable performance member 14 is not in operation (when the movable performance is not executed) or when it starts operating (when the movable performance starts), or even if a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the time required for the movable performance member 14 to move from the standby position to the operating position) after the conditions for moving the movable performance member 14 from the standby position to the operating position (operating conditions for the movable performance member 14) have been met, the operating position signal may not be ON (operating position detection sensor 17b is in a detection state), or the standby position detection signal may be ON (standby position detection sensor 17a is If the operating status of the movable performance member 14 and the position detection signal (the detection status of the position detection sensor 17) do not match, such as if the detection status remains in the detection state, or if a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the time required for the movable performance member 14 to move from the operating position to the standby position) after the conditions for moving the movable performance member 14 from the operating position to the standby position (the return conditions for the movable performance member 14) have been met, but the standby position detection signal does not turn ON (the standby position detection sensor 17a is in a detection state), or if the operating position detection signal remains ON (the operating position detection sensor 17b is in a detection state), then it can be determined that an abnormality of the movable performance member 14 (an abnormality of the movable part) has occurred.

The position detection sensor 17 (either one or both of the standby position detection sensor 17a and the operating position detection sensor 17b) is also called the "position detection means," the performance control microcontroller 91 capable of detecting abnormalities in the movable performance member 14 is also called the "abnormality detection means," and either one or both of the standby position detection signal and the operating position detection signal are also called the "position detection signal."

The sub-control board 90 is connected to a first performance button detection switch 63c and a second performance button detection switch 63d, which detect when the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b (see Figure 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). When a player performs a predetermined input operation on the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b, a signal from the corresponding performance button detection switch is input to the sub-control board 90. The first performance button detection switch 63c is also called the "first operation detection means," and the second performance button detection switch 63d is also called the "second operation detection means." Furthermore, either the first performance button detection switch 63c or the second performance button detection switch 63d, or both, are referred to as the "performance button detection switch" or "operation detection means."

[Summary of the prize]
Next, an overview of the winning outcomes of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained. In this embodiment, there are two results from the special symbol win/loss determination: "jackpot" and "loss". As mentioned above, when it is a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is displayed in the special symbol display section, and when it is a "loss", the "loss symbol" is displayed in the special symbol display section. In other words, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed as either a jackpot symbol (specific form) or a loss symbol (non-specific form) depending on the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (jackpot or loss).

If the special symbol win/loss judgment determines a jackpot, a "special game" is executed, opening the large prize slot 30 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol) displayed. The special game executed after a jackpot is also called a "jackpot game," the game state in which a special game is possible is called a "special game state," and the game state in which a jackpot game is possible is also called a "jackpot game state."

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with multiple jackpots. Specifically, as shown in Figure 6, there are a total of nine types of jackpots: "10R (Round) 1st Jackpot," "10R 2nd Jackpot," "10R 3rd Jackpot," "10R 4th Jackpot," "10R 5th Jackpot," "5R 6th Jackpot," "5R 7th Jackpot," "10R 8th Jackpot," and "10R 9th Jackpot." Of these jackpots, "10R 1st Jackpot," "10R 2nd Jackpot," "10R 3rd Jackpot," "10R 4th Jackpot," "10R 5th Jackpot," "5R 6th Jackpot," and "5R 7th Jackpot" are jackpots related to the 1st special symbol, while "10R 8th Jackpot" and "10R 9th Jackpot" are jackpots related to the 2nd special symbol. The special symbol display section will stop and display the winning symbols corresponding to each type of jackpot. Note that in this specification, rounds may be abbreviated as "R".

The 10R 1st jackpot, the 10R 8th jackpot, and the 10R 9th jackpot all have 10 rounds, the large prize slot 30 opens once per round from 1R to 10R, and the large prize slot 30 is open for 25 seconds per round from 1R to 10R. A 25-second opening is also called a "long opening."

Both the 5R 6th jackpot and the 5R 7th jackpot are jackpots with "5" rounds, where the large prize slot 30 opens "once" in each round from 1R to 5R, and where the large prize slot 30 is open for "25 seconds" in each round from 1R to 5R.

The 10R 2nd jackpot is a jackpot with "10" rounds, where the large prize slot 30 opens "once" in each round from 1R to 10R, and the large prize slot 30 is open for "25 seconds" in each round from 1R to 10R.

The 10R 3rd jackpot is a jackpot with "10" rounds, the large prize slot 30 opens "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the large prize slot 30 is "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 7R, and "0.1 seconds" for each round from 8R to 10R. An opening time of "0.1 seconds" is also called a "short opening." In jackpot games related to the 10R 3rd jackpot (also called "10R 3rd jackpot games"), the opening time of the large prize slot 30 per round from 8R to 10R is an extremely short "0.1 seconds," making the possibility of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 extremely low (effectively zero). Therefore, in a 10R third jackpot game, the probability of the game ball entering the large prize pocket 30 increases during rounds 1 through 7, where the opening time per round is said to be "25 seconds," making it easier to get the game ball into the large prize pocket 30. Thus, a 10R third jackpot is effectively a "7R jackpot," and a 10R third jackpot game is effectively a "7R jackpot game."

The 10R 4th jackpot is a jackpot with "10" rounds, the large prize slot 30 opens "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the large prize slot 30 is open for "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 5R and for "0.1 seconds" for each round from 6R to 10R. In the jackpot game related to the 10R 4th jackpot (also called the "10R 4th jackpot game"), the opening time of the large prize slot 30 per round from 6R to 10R is an extremely short "0.1 seconds," making the possibility of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 extremely low (effectively zero). For this reason, in the 10R 4th jackpot game, the possibility of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 increases in rounds 1R to 5R, where the opening time per round is "25 seconds," making it possible to easily get the game ball into the large prize slot 30. Therefore, a 10R fourth jackpot is effectively a "5R jackpot," and a 10R fourth jackpot game is effectively a "5R jackpot game."

The 10R 5th jackpot is a jackpot with "10" rounds, the large prize slot 30 opens "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the large prize slot 30 is open for "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 3R and for "0.1 seconds" for each round from 4R to 10R. In the jackpot game related to the 10R 5th jackpot (also called the "10R 5th jackpot game"), the opening time of the large prize slot 30 per round from 4R to 10R is an extremely short "0.1 seconds," making the possibility of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 extremely low (effectively zero). For this reason, in the 10R 4th jackpot game, the possibility of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 increases in rounds 1R to 3R, where the opening time per round is "25 seconds," making it possible to easily get the game ball into the large prize slot 30. Therefore, a 10R fifth jackpot is effectively a "3R jackpot," and a 10R fifth jackpot game is effectively a "3R jackpot game."

Of these nine types of jackpots, the 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot have a fixed interval time (for example, about 0.5 to 1 second) between each round, and each round from the 1st round to the final round is played with the same (fixed) interval time in between. The 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot, which are played in this manner, can be considered typical jackpots.

In contrast, the 10R second jackpot and the 10R third jackpot (effectively a 7R jackpot) have different interval times depending on whether the rounds 3, 5, and 7 have finished, or whether the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, and 9R) have finished. The former interval is longer than the latter. For example, the interval between rounds 3, 5, and 7 has finished is approximately 3 to 5 seconds, while the interval between rounds 1, 2, 4, 6, 8R, and 9R has finished is approximately 0.5 to 1 second.

The 10R 4th jackpot (effectively a 5R jackpot) has different interval times depending on whether it's after rounds 3 and 5, or after any other round (rounds 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, and 9). The former interval is longer than the latter. For example, the interval between rounds 3 and 5 is approximately 3 to 5 seconds, while the interval between rounds after any other round (also called the "second interval") is approximately 0.5 to 1 second.

The 10R 5th jackpot (effectively a 3R jackpot) has different interval times depending on whether it's after the completion of 3 rounds or after the completion of any other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R). The former interval is longer than the latter. For example, the interval after the completion of 3 rounds is approximately 3 to 5 seconds, while the interval after the completion of any other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) is approximately 0.5 to 1 second.

In the 10R (Round 10) 2nd to 5th jackpots, a relatively long interval time (for example, approximately 3 to 5 seconds) is called the "first interval time," and a relatively short interval time (for example, approximately 0.5 to 1 second) is called the "second interval time."

During the interval between rounds in which the first interval time is set (also called the "interval period"), an effect indicating whether or not the large prize slot 30 will be opened for a long time in the next round, that is, whether or not a round with a long opening will be executed (continued), is performed using the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), etc. The interval between rounds in which the first interval time is set is also called the "round branching timing," and the effect performed at the round branching timing is also called the "round branching effect."

For example, during the round-breaking timing after the third round of a 10R fifth jackpot game, a round-breaking animation is performed that suggests that the long-open round will not be executed (continued) in subsequent rounds (for example, a long-open round end animation or a jackpot end animation). Similarly, during the round-breaking timing after the third round of a 10R second to fourth jackpot game, a round-breaking animation is performed that suggests that the long-open round will continue in subsequent rounds (for example, a long-open round continuation animation).

Furthermore, during the round break (round branching timing) after the 5th round of a 10R 4th jackpot game, a round branching animation is performed that suggests that the long-open round will not be executed (continued) in subsequent rounds (for example, a long-open round end animation or a jackpot end animation). Similarly, during the round break (round branching timing) after the 5th round of a 10R 2nd or 3rd jackpot game, a round branching animation is performed that suggests that the long-open round will continue in subsequent rounds (for example, a long-open round continuation animation).

Furthermore, during the round break (round branching timing) after the 7th round of the 10R 3rd jackpot game ends, a round branching animation is performed that suggests that the long-open round will not be executed (continued) in subsequent rounds (for example, a long-open round end animation or a jackpot end animation). Similarly, during the round break (round branching timing) after the 7th round of the 10R 2nd jackpot game ends, a round branching animation is performed that suggests that the long-open round will continue in subsequent rounds (for example, a long-open round continuation animation).

Thus, in the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, a longer interval time (first interval time) is set between rounds that determine whether the long-open round continues or not (round branching timing), compared to other rounds. The round branching animation is executed during this interval time. In this way, the jackpot gameplay related to the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, where the round branching animation is executed at the round branching timing, is called a "rank-up bonus," and is a special type of jackpot with different gameplay from general jackpots such as the 10R 1st jackpot. Hereafter, the rank-up bonus may be referred to as "RUB."

Here, a round is also called a "round game," and a round game is also called a "large prize opening/closing game," a "variable ball entry game," or a "special ball entry game." Furthermore, the 6th and 7th jackpots of the 5R rounds are collectively referred to as a "5R jackpot," and the 1st to 5th jackpots of the 10R rounds and the 8th and 9th jackpots of the 10R rounds are collectively referred to as a "10R jackpot." Furthermore, the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots are also called "special jackpots," while jackpots other than the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots (special jackpots) (10R 1st, 8th, and 9th jackpots, and 5R 6th and 7th jackpots) are called "regular jackpots." Jackpot games related to regular jackpots (5R jackpot games or 10R jackpot games) are also called "1st special games," and jackpot games related to special jackpots (Rank-Up Bonus (RUB)) are also called "2nd special games." Also, focusing on the number of rounds in the jackpot game, a 5R jackpot game can also be called a "1st special game," and a 10R jackpot game can be called a "2nd special game."

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots based on the number of rounds are set to two: 5R jackpots and 10R jackpots. However, it is possible to provide various types of jackpots, such as three types (3R jackpots, 6R jackpots, and 10R jackpots) or one type (7R jackpot). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds for a jackpot game is set to 10R (10R jackpot), but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the maximum number of rounds to more than 10 (e.g., 15R) or fewer than 10 (e.g., 9R).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to transition the game state after the jackpot game ends to a high probability state, a time-saving state, a high base state, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that occurs (winning). Specifically, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and that jackpot is one of the aforementioned 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, 5R 6th jackpot, or 10R 8th jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the "high probability state, time-saving state, and high base state" described later (see Figure 6). On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and that jackpot is one of the aforementioned 5R 7th jackpot or 10R 9th jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the "low probability state, time-saving state, and high base state" described later (see Figure 6). Therefore, the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, the 5R 6th jackpot, and the 10R 8th jackpot can be considered "probability-increasing jackpots," while the 5R 7th jackpot and the 10R 9th jackpot can be considered "non-probability-increasing jackpots" (also called "regular jackpots" or "time-saving jackpots").

Here, regarding the special symbols that trigger a jackpot game (specific patterns, specific display results), the jackpot symbols can be distinguished according to the type of jackpot. For example, when distinguishing between non-probability-increasing jackpots and probability-increasing jackpots, the jackpot symbols related to non-probability-increasing jackpots can be called "first specific patterns" or "first specific display results," and the jackpot symbols related to probability-increasing jackpots can be called "second specific patterns" or "second specific display results." Furthermore, when distinguishing between general jackpots and special jackpots, the jackpot symbols related to general jackpots can be called "first specific patterns" or "first specific display results," and the jackpot symbols related to special jackpots can be called "second specific patterns" or "second specific display results."

As shown in Figures 6 and 8(B), when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1), the distribution probabilities for each jackpot are 5% for the 10R 1st jackpot, 5% for the 10R 2nd jackpot, 7% for the 10R 3rd jackpot, 10% for the 10R 4th jackpot, 13% for the 10R 5th jackpot, 15% for the 5R 6th jackpot, and 45% for the 5R 7th jackpot. In contrast, when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2), the distribution probabilities for each jackpot are 55% for the 10R 8th jackpot and 45% for the 10R 9th jackpot. In other words, when a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 (special figure 2 jackpot determination), the probability of a 10R jackpot occurring (distribution probability) is 100%, which is higher than when a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (special figure 1 jackpot determination). Thus, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that a jackpot determined by the win/loss determination (special figure 2 jackpot determination) when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more likely to be advantageous to the player in terms of the amount of prize balls that can be won (number of prize balls). For this reason, players play the game hoping that a ball will enter the second starting port 21. This is particularly noticeable when the opening extension function (described later) is in operation, which increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting opening 21 (when a high base state is occurring).

The determination of whether it is a jackpot or a miss is made based on the "random number for determining the success or failure of special symbols (also called "success or failure determination information")," and if the result of the success or failure determination is a jackpot, the determination of the type of jackpot is made based on the "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also called "jackpot type determination information")." In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 7(A), the random number for determining the success or failure of special symbols takes a value in the range of "0 to 629," and the random number for determining the type of jackpot takes a value in the range of "0 to 99." The random number for determining the success or failure of special symbols and the random number for determining the type of jackpot are random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first start opening 20 and the second start opening 21. As mentioned above, the type of jackpot corresponds to the type of jackpot symbol (see Figure 6). For this reason, the random number for determining the type of jackpot is also called the "random number for determining the symbol" or "symbol determination information." The various random number values (random number ranges) exemplified in this specification are merely examples and can be arbitrarily set according to the control specifications.

The random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on ball entry into the first start gate 20 and the second start gate 21 include, in addition to random numbers for determining whether a special symbol is correct and random numbers for determining the type of jackpot, there are also "random numbers for determining the variation pattern" (also called "variation pattern determination information") as shown in Figure 7(A). The variation pattern determination random numbers are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variation time, and in this embodiment, they take values in the range of "0 to 198".

Furthermore, the random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on the passage through gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether a regular symbol wins or losses, as shown in Figure 7(B). These random numbers are used to determine whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting gate 21 (regular symbol lottery), and in this embodiment, they take values in the range of "0 to 240".

[Game status]
Next, the game states of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 has multiple game states, depending on the combination of the activation or deactivation states of the special symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function, the regular symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function, and the regular electric mechanism opening extension function. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is also called the "high probability state" or "probability variation state," and the state in which it is not activated is also called the "low probability state,""normalstate," or "non-probability variation state."

In the high-probability state, the probability of a special symbol winning is higher than in the normal state (low-probability state). That is, in the normal state, the win/loss determination is performed using a win/loss table for the normal state, while in the high-probability state, the win/loss determination is performed using a win/loss determination table for the high-probability state, which has a larger number of random numbers for determining whether a special symbol wins (see Figure 8(A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of the special symbol variation display resulting in a win (the stopping symbol being a win symbol) is higher compared to when it is not activated.

Furthermore, the state in which the special symbols (first and second special symbols) are affected by the reduced variation time function is called the "reduced time state" or "reduced variation state," while the state in which it is not affected is called the "non-reduced time state" or "normal variation state." In the reduced time state, the average variation time of the special symbols (the time from the start to the end (confirmation display) of the variation display of the special symbols, also called the "special symbol variation time") is shorter than the average variation time of the special symbols in the non-reduced time state. In other words, in the reduced time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is designed so that variation patterns with shorter variation times for the special symbols (also called "reduced variation patterns") are more likely to be selected than in the non-reduced time state (see Figures 9A and 9B). As a result, in the reduced time state, the rate at which special symbol reserves are consumed is faster, and effective ball entries into the starting slot (ball entries that can be stored as special symbol reserves) are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under smooth gameplay.

The probability variation function and variation time reduction function for special symbols (first and second special symbols) may operate simultaneously, or only one may operate. Furthermore, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for regular symbols operate in sync with the variation time reduction function for special symbols. In other words, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for regular symbols operate when the special symbols are in a time-reduced state, and do not operate when they are not. Therefore, in the time-reduced state, the probability of a regular symbol win is higher than in the non-time-reduced state. Specifically, in the time-reduced state, the regular symbol win/loss determination (regular symbol determination) is performed using a regular symbol win/loss determination table where the value of the regular symbol random number (winning random number) that determines a win is greater than that used in the non-time-reduced state (see Figure 8(C)).

In the time-saving state, the variation time of the normal symbols (the time from the start to the end (confirmation display) of the variation of the normal symbols, also called the "normal symbol variation time") is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the normal symbol variation time in the non-time-saving state is 30 seconds, and the normal symbol variation time in the time-saving state is 1 second (see Figure 8(D)). In addition, in the time-saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable prize entry device 22 (second start opening 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second start opening 21 in auxiliary games (normal symbol winning games) is longer than in the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening count increase function of the variable prize entry device 22 is activated, and the number of times the second start opening 21 is opened in auxiliary games is greater than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the normal symbol win/loss judgment is a win, the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22 (second start opening 21) performs an opening operation for 0.2 seconds once. In a time-saving state, if the result of the normal symbol win/loss judgment is a win, the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22 (second start opening 21) performs an opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

When the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, as well as the opening time extension function and opening frequency increase function of the variable prize entry device 22, are activated, the second start opening 21 opens more frequently than when these functions are not activated, and the frequency of game balls entering the second start opening 21 increases. As a result, the base rate, which is the ratio of prize balls to the number of balls launched, increases. Therefore, the state in which these functions are activated is called the "high base state" or "high frequency state," and the state in which they are not activated is called the "low base state." In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls (balls held).

Furthermore, the high base state (high frequency state) does not necessarily require all of the above functions to be activated. That is, it is sufficient if at least one of the following functions—the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening frequency increase function of the variable prize entry device 22—is activated, making the second start opening 21 more likely to open (increasing the frequency of ball entry) compared to when that function is not activated. Also, the high base state may be controlled independently of the time reduction state for special symbols. Such a function that generates a high base state is also called the "high base generation function."

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, after a jackpot game (after a special game) following any of the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, 5R 6th jackpot, or 10R 8th jackpot, the game state becomes a high-probability state for special symbols, a time-saving state for special symbols, and a high-base state (see Figure 6). This game state is also called the "high-probability, high-base state." The high-probability, high-base state ends when the special symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot is achieved and the jackpot game is executed. This high-probability, high-base state is what is known as a "probability variation state" for the player.

Furthermore, if either a 5R 7th jackpot or a 10R 9th jackpot occurs, the game state after the jackpot game (after the special game) will be the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbols, as well as the time-saving state and high base state of the special symbols (see Figure 6). This game state is also called the "low probability high base state." The low probability high base state ends when the special symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, three game states can be set as game states in which the display of special symbols (identification information) can be varied: "low probability low base state," "low probability high base state," and "high probability high base state." In addition, a state where the special symbols are in a high probability state, not in a time-saving state, and in a low base state, i.e., a "high probability low base state," may also be set.

In high-base states, such as low-probability high-base states and high-probability high-base states, it is advantageous to shoot the game ball to the right to enter the right game area 3B. This is because, in high-base states, the second starting opening 21 is more easily opened compared to low-base states, making it easier to shoot the ball into the second starting opening 21 than into the first starting opening 20 (the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening is higher than that of the first starting opening). Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which triggers the determination of whether a regular symbol wins or losses, the player should shoot to the right to enter the second starting opening 21. This allows for a greater number of starting ball entries (opportunities for determining whether a special symbol win or loss) compared to shooting to the left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner, indicating that the game state is one in which the game ball should be aimed at the right game area 3B (right-shooting instruction notification).

In contrast, in a low-base state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state), it is more advantageous to shoot the game ball to the left to enter the left game area 3A. This is because, in a low-base state, the second starting opening 21 is less likely to open compared to a high-base state, and it is easier to shoot the ball into the first starting opening 20 than into the second starting opening 21 (the probability of the game ball entering the first starting opening is higher than that of the second starting opening). Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball to enter the first starting opening 20. This allows for a greater number of starting ball entries (opportunities for determining whether a special symbol is hit or miss) compared to shooting to the right. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner (display control), indicating that the game state is one in which the game ball should be aimed at the left game area 3A (left-shooting instruction notification).

The launch direction indicator 47 has two LEDs labeled "y" and "z," and can indicate the launch direction by illuminating the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in a low base state, the display can show "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on), indicating that the ball should be launched towards the left game area by turning off both LEDs. In a high base state, the display can show "y■z■" (for example, □: off, ■: on), indicating that the ball should be launched towards the right game area by turning on both LEDs.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, if we use the low probability low base state, in which no jackpot games are being played, as the baseline, this low probability low base state can be considered a "normal game state," and games in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable games) in this state can be considered a "normal game." On the other hand, the high probability high base state and the low probability high base state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base state, so these high probability high base state and low probability high base state can be considered "special game states," and games in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in these states can be considered a "special game." Among the variable game states, the low probability low base state is also called the "first game state," and either the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state, or both, are also called the "second game state." Furthermore, focusing on the probability of winning a jackpot, a low-probability state (low-probability, low-base state or low-probability, high-base state) can be called the "first game state," and a high-probability state (high-probability, low-base state or high-probability, high-base state) can be called the "second game state."

A jackpot game is a game that can be played when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stops. For the player, this means that a large number of prize balls can be won by having the game balls enter the large prize winning slot 30. Therefore, a game state in which a jackpot game is played is more advantageous to the player than a game state in which a jackpot game is not played (a variable game state). For this reason, compared to a game state in which a jackpot game is not played, a game state in which a jackpot game is played can be considered a "special game state," and a jackpot game played in this state can be considered a "special game."

Furthermore, low-base states, such as the low-probability low-base state and the high-probability low-base state, are game states in which the game progresses by shooting the game balls to the left game area 3A by shooting to the left, as mentioned above. Therefore, low-base states can be considered as "left-handed shooting game states." On the other hand, high-base states, such as the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state, as well as states in which jackpot games are played by aiming to get the game balls into the large prize pocket, are game states in which the game progresses by shooting the game balls to the right game area 3B by shooting to the right, as mentioned above. Therefore, high-base states and jackpot game states can be considered as "right-handed shooting game states." As mentioned above, in the high base state (right-handed play state), the second start port 21 is more likely to open compared to the low base state (left-handed play state), making it easier for game balls to enter the second start port 21 than the first start port 20. Furthermore, it is set up so that it is more likely for the player to win a jackpot based on the second special symbol win/loss determination based on game balls entering the second start port 21 than on the first special symbol win/loss determination based on game balls entering the first start port 20. For this reason, the left-handed play state can be considered the "normal play state," and games in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable games) in this state can be considered "normal games." Also, the right-handed play state, which is more advantageous for the player than the left-handed play state, can be considered the "special play state," and games in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable games) in this state can be considered "special games." In this case, the left-handed play state (low base state) is also called the "first play state," and the right-handed play state is also called the "second play state."

Furthermore, while both the high-probability, low-base state and the low-probability, low-base state are low-base states, the high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability state because the probability variation function of the special symbols is activated, increasing the probability of the special symbols resulting in a jackpot. Therefore, the high-probability, low-base state can be considered a "special game state," and games that feature the variation of special symbols in this state (variation games) can be considered "special games." In this case, the low-probability, low-base state is also called the "first game state," and the high-probability, low-base state is also called the "second game state."

The control related to the setting and transition of the various game states described above is performed by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the activation/deactivation of the probability variation function, functions as a probability setting means that can set the winning probability (jackpot probability) for the special symbol win/loss determination to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability). Furthermore, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the activation/deactivation of the variation time reduction function, functions as a shortened variation state setting means (time reduction state setting means) that can set a shortened variation state (time reduction state) in which the variation time of the special symbols is shorter than normal.

[Main control processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (game control means) (control processing by the main control unit 80) will be explained based on Figures 10 to 36. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc., that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. Also, in this specification, "S" in S101, etc. ("S" in the flowchart) means step.

When the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on and power is supplied to the machine, the microcomputer 81 for game control reads and executes the main control processing program shown in Figure 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. As shown in the figure, the main control processing first performs initial settings (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings for the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and resetting various flags, statuses, and counters. The initial value of the flags is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counters is "0". Initial settings (S101) are executed only once after power-on (upon power-on) and are not executed thereafter.

Furthermore, when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is pressed when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, that is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM (also called the "predetermined memory area") of the main control board 80 is initialized, and a RAM clear command is sent to the sub-control board 90. The initialization of the RAM is also called "RAM clearing." The power switch is provided on the power supply board 109 (see Figure 2), and the RAM clear switch is provided near the power switch. This initialization of the RAM of the main control board 80 (RAM clearing) corresponds to one aspect of the "initialization process that initializes the contents of the predetermined memory area," and the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the initialization of the RAM of the main control board 80 (initialization process) corresponds to one aspect of the "initialization process execution means."

Following the initial setup (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and the main random number update process for normal and special symbols (S103) is executed. In the main random number update process for normal and special symbols (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in Figure 7 are updated by incrementing them by 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches its upper limit, it resets to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter values (random values) are sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

Once the main random number update process for normal and special symbols (S103) is complete, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. The interrupt process (S105) is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a 4ms cycle. Then, between the completion of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the main random number update process for normal and special symbols (S103) is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while interrupts are disabled, the interrupt process (S105) will not start immediately, but will only start after interrupts are enabled (S104).

[Interrupt handling]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained. As shown in Figure 11, interrupt processing (S105) first executes output processing (S201). In output processing (S201), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 for each of the processes described below are output to the sub-control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. A command consists of, for example, two bytes of information, in which case the upper byte is information about the type of command and the lower byte is information about the content of the command. The information that can be output from the main control board 80 includes, for example, information regarding the game state (also called "game state information"), information regarding the result of the special symbol win/failure judgment (also called "win/failure judgment result information"), information regarding the type of jackpot (type of jackpot symbol) (also called "jackpot type information" or "jackpot symbol information"), information regarding the number of special symbol reserves (reserves) (also called "memory information" or "reserve count information"), information regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (also called "variation pattern information"), and information regarding the result of the pre-judgment described later (also called "pre-judgment result information").

In the input processing (S202) that follows the output processing (S201), detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the pachinko game machine 1 (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, big prize port sensor 30a, etc.) are read and stored in the RAM output buffer as prize ball information. Furthermore, detection signals from a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 62 is full are also acquired and stored in the RAM output buffer as lower tray full data.

The next process, the update of the main random numbers for normal and special symbols (S203), is the same as the update of the main random numbers for normal and special symbols (S103) performed in the main control process shown in Figure 10. That is, the update process for the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in Figure 7 is performed both during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and during other periods (the period from the end of the interrupt process (S105) until the start of the next interrupt process (S105)).

Following the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S203), the following processes are executed: start-out sensor detection process (S204), start-up ball entry process (S205), normal symbol operation process (S206), special symbol operation process (S207), held ball count process (S208), and power outage monitoring process (S209), which will be described later. Afterward, other processes not closely related to the present invention (S210) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the processes S102 to S104 of the main control process are repeatedly executed (see Figure 10). When an interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 ms later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands and other information set in the RAM output buffer during the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in Figure 12, in the start-up sensor detection process (S204), it is first determined whether or not a game ball has passed through gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by gate sensor 28a (S301). If the game ball has not passed through gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305. If the game ball has passed through gate 28 (YES in S301), it is determined whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls (the number of normal symbol reserved balls, specifically the value of the counter in RAM that counts the number of normal symbol reserved balls) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of reserved balls with normal symbols is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls with normal symbols is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls with normal symbols (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol win/fail determination (label - TRND-H, see Figure 7(B)) stored in the RAM update value storage area (not shown) is acquired, and this acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls with normal symbols in the normal symbol reserved ball storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If no game ball has entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. If a game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S305), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 (the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2, specifically the value of the counter in the RAM of the main control unit 80 that counts the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2) is less than 4 (the upper limit) (S306). If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is less than 4 (YES in S306), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 (S307).

Next, the Special Symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the Special Symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol win/failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) (also called the "special symbol win/failure determination random number value"), the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) (also called the "jackpot type determination random number value"), and the variation pattern determination random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (also called the "variation pattern determination random number value") stored in the RAM update value storage area (not shown) are acquired (that is, the values of each random number shown in Figure 7(A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values (acquired information) are stored in the address space of the second special symbol hold storage unit corresponding to the current number of special symbol 2 held balls. In other words, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 21 while the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol 2 is less than 4, the conditions for acquiring the Special Symbol 2-related random numbers (acquisition conditions) are met. This triggers the acquisition of the Special Symbol 2-related random number values (random values for determining whether a special symbol is correct, random values for determining the type of jackpot, and random values for determining the variation pattern), which are then stored as the second Special Symbol reserved balls (reserved information).

Next, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). If no game ball has entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start port 20 (YES in S309), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 (the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1, specifically the value of the counter in the RAM of the main control unit 80 that counts the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1) is less than 4 (the upper limit) (S310). If the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process ends. However, if the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 is less than 4 (YES in S310), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 (S311).

Next, the Special Symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the Special Symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), similar to the Special Symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the Special Symbol win/failure determination counter (label-TRND-A) (random value for Special Symbol win/failure determination), the value of the Jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) (random value for Jackpot type determination), and the value of the variation pattern determination random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (random value for variation pattern determination) stored in the RAM update value storage area (not shown) are acquired (that is, the values of each random number shown in Figure 7(A) are acquired), and these acquired random values are stored in the address space of the first Special Symbol hold storage unit corresponding to the current number of Special Symbol 1 held balls. In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20 while the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol 1 is less than 4, the conditions for acquiring the Special Symbol 1-related random numbers (acquisition conditions) are met. This triggers the acquisition of the Special Symbol 1-related random number values (random values for determining whether a special symbol is correct, random values for determining the type of jackpot, and random values for determining the variation pattern), which are then stored as the first Special Symbol reserved balls (reserved information).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the random number acquisition process related to Feature Figure 2 (S308) and the random number acquisition process related to Feature Figure 1 (S312) in the start-gate sensor detection process (S204) described above, functions as an "acquisition means."

[Processing upon ball entry at start of game]
As shown in Figure 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry processing (S205) following the start gate sensor detection processing (S204). As shown in Figure 13, in the start ball entry processing (S205), it is first determined whether the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 has increased by "1" (S315). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 in S307 of the start gate sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second start gate. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) that was acquired in the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) of the immediately preceding start-gate sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special symbol hold memory unit is read out (S316). Next, the acquired random number (random number for the second special symbol hold) related to the read-out second special symbol is determined (S317).

In S317, the system determines whether the result is a win or loss (jackpot or miss) based on the random number used for determining the special symbol win/loss among the random numbers read in S316. If the result of this determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random number used for determining the type of jackpot.

The determination of win or loss in S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (so-called "pre-reading of the reserve") performed prior to the special symbol 2 win/loss determination process (S1202) described later, regarding the second special symbol reserve that is the subject of the determination. In other words, the result of the win/loss determination (jackpot or loss) performed when the second special symbol reserve is consumed is determined (pre-read) prior to the special symbol 2 win/loss determination process (S1202) described later.

The determination of the type of jackpot by S317 is equivalent to a pre-determination (hold pre-reading) performed prior to the special symbol 2 win/failure determination process (S1202) described later, when the second special symbol hold subject to the determination is a hold that results in a jackpot (also called a "jackpot hold"). In other words, it determines (pre-reads) the type of jackpot when the win/failure determination performed when the second special symbol hold is consumed is a jackpot, prior to the special symbol 2 win/failure determination process (S1202) described later. Furthermore, the determination of the type of jackpot by S317 also determines the jackpot symbol. That is, it determines (pre-reads) the jackpot symbol that will be determined when the second special symbol hold (jackpot hold) that results in a jackpot is consumed, prior to the special symbol 2 win/failure determination process (S1202) described later.

Furthermore, in S317, the variation pattern is determined based on the random values used for variation pattern determination from the random values obtained in S316. The variation pattern determination in S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (pre-reading of the reserve) performed prior to the special feature 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) described later, for the variation pattern of the second special feature reserve that is the subject of the determination. In other words, the variation pattern to be selected (determined) when the second special feature reserve is consumed is determined (pre-read) prior to the special feature 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) described later.

The pre-determination of whether a win or loss occurs (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random number for determining whether a special symbol win or loss read in S316 with the random number for determining whether a special symbol win or loss occurs (win/loss judgment value) in the win/loss judgment table, based on the win/loss judgment table shown in Figure 8(A). This comparison is made using the high-probability state win/loss judgment table if the game state during the reserved ball consumption is a high-probability state, or the normal state win/loss judgment table if it is a normal state (low-probability state). In this case, if the random number for determining whether a special symbol win or loss read in S316 matches the win/loss judgment value (win/loss judgment value) in the win/loss judgment table, the pre-determination result is a win; otherwise, the pre-determination result is a loss.

The pre-determination of the jackpot type (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random value for jackpot type determination read in S316 with the random value for jackpot type determination (jackpot type determination value) in the jackpot type determination table, based on the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 8(B). This table is used if the target special symbol hold is the first special symbol hold, or if it is the second special symbol hold, it is used. In this case, the random value for jackpot type determination read in S316 will match one of the jackpot type determination values in the jackpot type determination table, and the jackpot type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value will be the pre-determination result for the jackpot type.

The pre-determination of the variation pattern (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random value for determining the variation pattern read in S316 with the random value for determining the variation pattern (variation pattern determination value) in the variation pattern table, based on the variation pattern tables shown in Figures 9A and 9B. Specifically, if the game state during the consumption of held balls is not a time-saving state, use the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving state (see Figure 9A); if it is a time-saving state, use the variation pattern table for the time-saving state (see Figure 9B). In this case, the random value for determining the variation pattern read in S316 will match one of the variation pattern determination values in the variation pattern table, depending on the pre-determination result (jackpot or loss). The variation pattern corresponding to the matching variation pattern determination value becomes the pre-determination result of the variation pattern.

Next, in S318, command data containing information related to the results of the pre-determination (pre-determination of the second special symbol hold) performed in S317 (pre-determination result information), specifically information that can identify the pre-determination result of whether the ball is a win or a loss (also called "win/loss pre-determination result information"), information that can identify the pre-determination result of the type of jackpot (also called "jackpot type pre-determination result information"), and information that can identify the pre-determination result of the variation pattern (also called "variation pattern pre-determination result information") is generated as a special symbol 2 start ball entry command, and this command is set in the RAM output buffer (S318). Note that the special symbol 2 start ball entry command may also include information indicating some or all of the random values acquired for special symbol 2 read in S316 as pre-determination result information.

By analyzing the Special Feature 2 Start Ball Entry Command transmitted from the Main Control Unit 80 (output via output processing (S201)) in the Sub-Control Unit 90, it becomes possible to identify whether the information relates to a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is, what the variation pattern is, etc. In other words, the Sub-Control Unit 90 can execute a performance based on the pre-determination result information identified by the received Special Feature 2 Start Ball Entry Command. This is also true when the Sub-Control Unit 90 receives the Special Feature 1 Start Ball Entry Command, as described later. The term "Start Ball Entry Command" refers to either or both of the Special Feature 1 Start Ball Entry Command and the Special Feature 2 Start Ball Entry Command. Examples of performances (also called "pre-performance" or "pre-read performance") based on the pre-determination result information identified by the Start Ball Entry Command include performances that suggest the possibility of a jackpot (the expected value controlled by the special game state; hereinafter simply referred to as "expected value") and variation patterns.

Next, in S319, similar to the processing related to Special Feature 2 described above, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 has increased by "1" (S319). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 in S311 of the start-up-out sensor detection processing (S204) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start-up-out. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends there.

In S320, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON or OFF (S320). If the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., the system is in a high base state (YES in S320), the process ends without performing the steps from S321 onwards. On the other hand, if the time-saving flag is OFF, i.e., the system is in a low base state (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the pre-determination steps from S321 onwards.

Here, if the time-saving flag is ON, that is, if the current game state is a high base state, the opening extension function is activated, which increases the frequency of balls entering the second start port 21, making it easier to determine whether Special Symbol 2 is a winner or loser (determining whether the second special symbol is a winner or loser). Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the consumption of the second special symbol reserve (display of the second special symbol's variation) is performed in priority to the consumption of the first special symbol reserve (display of the first special symbol's variation) (a so-called Special Symbol 2 priority variation machine). In such a configuration, for example, if a pre-determination of Special Symbol 1 is performed and the result is notified to the player through a予告 (pre-announcement) or other effect, and the result of the pre-determination is clearly indicated as a jackpot, the player can use the priority consumption of the second special symbol reserve (priority variation of the second special symbol) to intentionally eliminate the second special symbol reserve (set it to "0") at any timing, thereby intentionally causing a jackpot related to Special Symbol 1 for which the result of the pre-determination was indicated. This allows for technical intervention. The ability for players to adjust the timing of jackpots is undesirable from the standpoint of fairness in gameplay. Therefore, if the current game state is a high-base state (YES in S320), the pre-determination process for Special Feature 1 from S321 onwards is not performed, and this process is terminated.

The processing in S321 to S323 is the same as the processing described in S316 to S318 above, but applied to Special Symbol 1. Specifically, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) obtained in the Special Symbol 1-related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the start-gate sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first Special Symbol hold storage unit is read (S321), and a pre-determination is performed on the acquired random number value related to the read first Special Symbol (random number value of the first Special Symbol hold) (S322).

In the pre-determination by S322 (pre-determination of the first special symbol hold), similar to the pre-determination by S317 (pre-determination of the second special symbol hold), pre-determination of win/loss, pre-determination of jackpot type, and pre-determination of variation pattern are performed. Of the pre-determinations by S322, the pre-determination of win/loss and the pre-determination of jackpot type are performed prior to the special symbol 1 win/loss determination process (S1207) described later, and the pre-determination of variation pattern is performed prior to the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208) described later.

The pre-determination of win/loss, pre-determination of jackpot type, and pre-determination of variation pattern by S322 can be performed in the same manner as the pre-determination of win/loss, pre-determination of jackpot type, and pre-determination of variation pattern by S317, based on the jackpot determination table (see Figure 8(A)), jackpot type determination table (see Figure 8(B)), and variation pattern table (see Figures 9A and 9B), respectively. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the pre-determination of win/loss, pre-determination of jackpot type, and pre-determination of variation pattern by S322 is omitted.

Then, command data containing information regarding the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination of the first special feature hold) performed in S322 (pre-determination result information) is generated as the special feature 1 start ball entry command, and this command is set in the RAM output buffer (S323). The special feature 1 start ball entry command is the same as the special feature 2 start ball entry command described above. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the special feature 1 start ball entry command is omitted.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processes S317 and S322 in the above-described ball entry processing (S205) functions as a "determination means." Furthermore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs a preliminary determination (S322) of the random value (acquired information) obtained from the special figure 1 based on the ball entering the first start opening 20 functions as a "first determination means," and the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs a preliminary determination (S317) of the random value (acquired information) obtained from the special figure 2 based on the ball entering the second start opening 21 functions as a "second determination means."

Here, the variation pattern tables used in the pre-determination of variation patterns (S317, S322) and the variation pattern selection process described later (S1203, S1208) will be explained with reference to Figures 9A and 9B. In this embodiment, the variation pattern tables include a variation pattern table for non-time-saving states (also called the "first variation pattern table") used when the game state is not a time-saving state when a variation game (variation display of special symbols) is executed, and a variation pattern table for time-saving states (also called the "second variation pattern table") used when the game state is a time-saving state when a variation game is executed. Figure 9A shows an example of the variation pattern table for non-time-saving states (first variation pattern table), and Figure 9B shows an example of the variation pattern table for time-saving states (second variation pattern table). Note that the data structure of the variation pattern tables, the types (contents) of variation patterns defined in the variation pattern tables, the number of variation patterns, etc., are not limited to those shown in this embodiment and can be appropriately changed according to the playability and specifications of the pachinko game machine.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment has three game states in which variable gameplay (variable display of identification information) is possible: a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, and a high probability high base state, and it is possible to control the game to any of these game states. The low base state (low probability low base state) is a state in which the game is played by shooting left-handed with the aim of getting the ball into the first start opening 20 (left-handed shooting state), and the game mainly consists of gameplay in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (also called "first variable gameplay"), and it is also a non-time-saving state in which the variable time reduction function is not activated. For this reason, the variable pattern table for the non-time-saving state (first variable pattern table) shown in Figure 9A is mainly used in the low base state to determine (judge) the variable pattern of the variable display of the first special symbol. However, although unlikely, if a variation display of the second special symbol occurs due to a game ball entering the second starting port 21 while the base state is low, the first variation pattern table will be used for that variation display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) is a state in which the game is played by shooting to the right, aiming to get the ball into the second start opening 21 (right-hand shooting state), and the game mainly involves displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner (also called "second variable game"). Since the high base state is also a time-saving state where the variable time reduction function is activated, the variable pattern table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 9B (second variable pattern table) is used in the high base state to determine (judge) the variable pattern of the variable display of the second special symbol. However, although unlikely, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the high base state due to the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 20, the second variable pattern table is used for the variable display of that first special symbol.

As shown in Figure 9A, the first variation pattern table covers variation patterns P1 to P10. In the first variation pattern table, a random number value (random number range) for determining the variation pattern (also called the "variation pattern determination value") is set for each variation pattern P1 to P10 as a determination value for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol's variation display. Of variation patterns P1 to P10, variation patterns P1 to P3 are jackpot variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot, while variation patterns P4 to P10 are losing variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the win/fail judgment is a loss. The variation pattern determination value is also called "determination information."

Variation patterns P1, P2, P4, and P5 have a variation time of 75,000 ms, variations P3 and P6 have a variation time of 45,000 ms, variations P7 have a variation time of 30,000 ms, variations P8 have a variation time of 12,000 ms, variations P9 have a variation time of 4,000 ms, and variations P10 have a variation time of 2,000 ms. The details of each variation pattern (the content of the variation effects executed based on each variation pattern) are shown in Figure 9A, but further details will be described later.

The variation pattern determination values corresponding to each variation pattern P1 to P3 (jackpot variation patterns) are the same regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls (1 to 4) at the start of the variation display. Specifically, the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P1 is set to "0 to 74" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variation display, the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P2 is set to "75 to 149" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variation display, and the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P3 is set to "150 to 198" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variation display.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 (missing fluctuation patterns) may be the same regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls (1 to 4) at the start of the fluctuation display, or it may differ depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls (1 to 4) at the start of the fluctuation display.

Specifically, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P4 is set to "0 to 3" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls when the variable display starts, and the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P5 is set to "4 to 7" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls when the variable display starts. In other words, the variable pattern determination values corresponding to variable pattern P4 and variable pattern P5 are both the same (common) regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls when the variable display starts.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P6 is set to "8 to 20" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2", and to "8 to 17" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "3" or "4". In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P6 is composed of a value that corresponds to variable pattern P6 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("8 to 17"), and a value that may or may not correspond to variable pattern P6 depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("18 to 20"). Therefore, the range (random number range) of the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P6 is considered to differ depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P7 is set to "21-38" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2", to "18-38" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "3", and to "18-33" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "4". In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P7 is composed of a value that corresponds to variable pattern P7 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("21-33"), and a value that may or may not correspond to variable pattern P7 depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("18-20" and "34-38"). Therefore, the range (random number range) of the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P7 is considered to differ depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each fluctuation pattern P8 to P10 (the losing fluctuation pattern) may or may not be set depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls (one of 1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts.

Specifically, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P8 is set to "39 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2," but not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "3" or "4." In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P8 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2," but not when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "3" or "4." Therefore, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special symbol win/loss judgment is a loss and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is "3" or "4," variable pattern P8 will not appear.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P9 is set to "39 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "3," but is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2" or "4." In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P9 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "3," but is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2" or "4." Therefore, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special symbol win/loss judgment is a loss and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is "1," "2," or "4," variable pattern P9 will not appear.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P10 is set to "34 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "4," but is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2" or "3." In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P10 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "4," but is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1 or 2" or "3." Therefore, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special symbol win/loss judgment is a loss and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is "1," "2," or "3," variable pattern P9 will not appear.

According to this first variation pattern table, for example, when a game ball enters the first start opening 20 (also called "first start ball entry") in a non-time-saving state (low probability, low base state), even if the number of balls held in Special Feature 1 when performing the pre-determination of the variation pattern related to the first start ball entry (S322) differs from the number of balls held in Special Feature 1 when performing the Special Feature 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208) related to the first start ball entry (when the variation display starts), no inconsistency will occur between the performance based on the result of the pre-determination related to the first start ball entry (Special Feature 1 start ball entry command) and the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation, for variation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot variation patterns) and variation patterns P4 and P5 (miss variation patterns).

In other words, for example, in a non-time-saving state (low probability, low base state), if a first starting ball entry occurs when a variable game is not being played, the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 changes from "0" to "1" due to the occurrence of the first starting ball entry, and the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 immediately after the first starting ball entry is "1". The number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 immediately after the starting ball entry is also called the "number of reserved balls at the time of the starting ball entry". Subsequently, since the variable display based on the first starting ball entry (starting ball entry when a variable game is not being played) immediately begins, the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 at the start of the variable display is "1". The number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 at the start of the variable display is also called the "number of reserved balls at the start of the variable display". In this case, both the number of reserved balls at the time of the starting ball entry and the number of reserved balls at the start of the variable display are "1", meaning the number of reserved balls is the same at both the time of the starting ball entry and the start of the variable display.

On the other hand, for example, suppose a first starting ball entry occurs in a non-time-saving state (low probability, low base state), and the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 changes from "1" to "2" as a result of this first starting ball entry. In this case, the number of reserved balls at the time of the starting ball entry is "2". The Special Feature 1 reserved ball corresponding to this first starting ball entry is called the "target reserved ball". Subsequently, if the target reserved ball is consumed without another first starting ball entry occurring before it is consumed, the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 decreases in the order of "2", "1", and "0". When the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 changes from "1" to "0", that is, the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation based on the target reserved ball is "1" (the number of reserved balls becomes "0" when the variation display starts). Also, if a first starting ball entry occurs before the target reserved ball is consumed, the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation based on the target reserved ball may fluctuate between "1" and "4".

Thus, the number of reserved balls may be the same at the time of initial ball entry and at the start of the variation, or they may be different. In this regard, according to the first variation pattern table, for variation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot variation patterns) and variation patterns P4 and P5 (miss variation patterns), the variation pattern determination value is the same regardless of the number of reserved balls in the special symbol when the variation display starts (see Figure 9A). Therefore, inconsistencies will not occur between the presentation based on the result of the pre-determination related to the first initial ball entry (special symbol 1 initial ball entry command) and the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation.

The above is an explanation of the first variation pattern table (variation pattern table for non-time-saving states). The same applies to the second variation pattern table (variation pattern table for time-saving states). That is, as shown in Figure 9B, the second variation pattern table covers variation patterns P11 to P18. In the second variation pattern table, a random value (random number range) for determining the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern determination value for each of the variation patterns P11 to P18. Of the variation patterns P11 to P18, variation patterns P11 to P13 are jackpot variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot, while variation patterns P14 to P18 are losing variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the win/fail judgment is a loss.

Variation patterns P11 and P14 have a variation time of 75,000 ms, variations P12 and P15 have a variation time of 45,000 ms, variations P13 and P16 have a variation time of 30,000 ms, variations P17 have a variation time of 12,000 ms, and variations P18 have a variation time of 1,000 ms. The details of each variation pattern (the content of the variation effects executed based on each variation pattern) are shown in Figure 9B, but further details will be described later.

The variable pattern determination values corresponding to each of the variable patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot variable patterns) are the same regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls (1 to 4) at the start of the variable display. Specifically, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P11 is set to "0 to 69" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display; the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P12 is set to "70 to 139" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display; and the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P13 is set to "140 to 198" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P14 to P16 (missing fluctuation patterns) may be the same regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls (1 to 4) at the start of the fluctuation display, or it may differ depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls (1 to 4) at the start of the fluctuation display.

Specifically, the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P14 is set to "0 to 1" regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls when the variation display begins. In other words, the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P14 is the same regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls when the variation display begins.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P15 is set to "2 to 5" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1", and to "2 to 3" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "2, 3, or 4". In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P15 is composed of a value that corresponds to variable pattern P15 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("2 to 3"), and a value that may or may not correspond to variable pattern P15 depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("4 to 5"). Therefore, the range (random number range) of the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P15 is considered to differ depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P16 is set to "6 to 11" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1", and to "4 to 9" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "2, 3, or 4". In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P16 is composed of a value that corresponds to variable pattern P16 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("6 to 9"), and a value that may or may not correspond to variable pattern P16 depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display ("4 to 5" and "10 to 11"). Therefore, the range (random number range) of the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P16 is considered to differ depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation pattern determination values corresponding to fluctuation patterns P17 and P18 (missing fluctuation patterns) may or may not be set depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls (one of 1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts.

Specifically, the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P17 is set to "12 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of variation display is "1," but not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of variation display is "2 to 4." In other words, the variation pattern determination value corresponding to variation pattern P17 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of variation display is "1," and not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of variation display is "2 to 4." Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state, if the result of the second special symbol win/loss judgment is a loss and the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls at the start of the variation display of the second special symbol is "2," "3," or "4," variation pattern P17 will not appear.

The variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P18 is set to "10 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "2 to 4," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1." In other words, the variable pattern determination value corresponding to variable pattern P18 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "2 to 4," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls at the start of the variable display is "1." Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state, if the result of the second special symbol win/loss judgment is a loss and the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls at the start of the second special symbol's variable display is "1," variable pattern P18 will not appear.

According to this second variation pattern table, for example, when a game ball enters the second start opening 21 (also called "second start ball entry") during a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), even if the number of balls held in Special Feature 2 when performing the pre-determination of the variation pattern related to the second start ball entry (S317) differs from the number of balls held in Special Feature 2 when performing the Special Feature 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) related to the second start ball entry (when the variation display starts), no inconsistency will occur between the performance based on the result of the pre-determination related to the second start ball entry (Special Feature 2 start ball entry command) and the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation for variation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot variation patterns) and variation pattern P14 (miss variation pattern). The reason for this is the same as in the case of the first variation pattern table described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Here, in the variation pattern table, among the variation pattern judgment values (judgment information) set for each of the multiple variation patterns, the judgment values set for each of the variation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot variation patterns), variation patterns P4 and P5 (loss variation patterns), variation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot variation patterns), and variation pattern P14 (judgment values that are considered the same regardless of the number of special symbol reserve balls when the variation display starts) are also called "specific judgment information." Any or all of the variation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot variation patterns) and variation patterns P4 and P5 (loss variation patterns) associated with the specific judgment information are also called "specific variation patterns." Any or all of the other variation patterns P6 to P10 and P15 to P18 (variation patterns different from specific variation patterns) are also called "non-specific variation patterns."

When performing a pre-determination of the variation pattern based on the first variation pattern table, it is possible to determine which of variation patterns P1 to P10 (multiple variation patterns) the variation display based on the special symbol hold subject to determination will be, or whether it will be variation pattern P1, P2, P3, P4, or P5 (a specific variation pattern) among variation patterns P1 to P10 (multiple variation patterns). Based on the results of these determinations, it is possible to execute the performance (pre-performance).

In the pre-determination of the variation pattern based on the first variation pattern table, the determination of whether the variation pattern of the variation display based on the special symbol hold to be judged becomes a specific variation pattern can be made by determining whether the random value for variation pattern determination (variation pattern determination information) obtained based on the initial ball entry matches the determination value (determination information) in the first variation pattern table that is considered the same regardless of the number of special symbol hold balls (if the result of the pre-determination of whether it is a win or a loss, the determination value is "0 to 74", "75 to 149", or "150 to 198", and if it is a loss, the determination value is "0 to 3" or "4 to 7").

When performing a pre-determination of the variation pattern based on the second variation pattern table, it is possible to determine which of variation patterns P11 to P18 (multiple variation patterns) the variation display based on the special symbol hold subject to determination will be, or whether it will be variation pattern P11, P12, P13, or P14 (specific variation pattern) among variation patterns P11 to P18 (multiple variation patterns). Based on the results of these determinations, it is possible to execute the performance (pre-performance).

In the pre-determination of the variation pattern based on the second variation pattern table, the determination of whether the variation pattern of the variation display based on the special symbol hold to be judged becomes a specific variation pattern can be made by determining whether the random value for variation pattern determination (variation pattern determination information) obtained based on the initial ball entry matches the determination value (determination information) in the second variation pattern table that is considered the same regardless of the number of special symbol hold balls (if the result of the pre-determination of whether it is a win or a loss is "0 to 69", "70 to 139", or "140 to 198", and if it is a loss is "0 to 1").

[General operation processing]
The microcomputer 81 for game control performs the normal symbol operation processing (S206) shown in Figure 14, following the start ball entry processing (S205). In the normal symbol operation processing (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable prize winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and normal symbol operation status "1" to "4" is assigned to each of these stages. If the normal symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S401), normal symbol standby processing (S402) is performed, if it is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), normal symbol variation processing (S404) is performed, if it is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal symbol confirmation processing (S406) is performed, and if it is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric prize processing (S407) is performed. Note that the default setting for the general operation status is "1".

[Normal symbol waiting process]
As shown in Figure 15, in the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "0" (S501). If it is "0" (YES in S501), this process is terminated without performing the processes from S502 onwards. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol win/failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in Figure 8(D) is referred to, and if the game state is a time-saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is not a time-saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, after performing the normal symbol random number shifting process (S504) described below, the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and this process is completed. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Also, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation.

[Normal symbol win/loss determination process]
As shown in Figure 16, in the normal symbol win/failure determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol win/failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the lowest area of the normal symbol hold memory unit (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first normal symbol hold) (the oldest stored value) is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON or not (whether the game state is a time-saving state or not) (S602). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., that the game state is a time-saving state (YES in S602), a high-probability normal symbol win/failure determination is performed based on the time-saving state table (win determination values from "0" to "239") of the normal symbol win/failure determination table shown in Figure 8(C) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the normal symbol win/failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) matches any of the win determination values.

In contrast, if the time-saving flag is not ON in S602, i.e., if it is determined that the system is not in a time-saving state (NO in S602), then a low-probability normal symbol win/loss determination is performed based on the table for the non-time-saving state (win determination value "0" or "1") among the normal symbol win determination tables shown in Figure 8(C) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.

In S605, the system determines whether the result of the regular symbol win/loss judgment (S603, S604) is a win (regular symbol win) (S605). If it is determined to be a loss (not a win) (NO in S605), the losing regular symbol to be displayed is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a win (regular symbol win) (YES in S605), the winning regular symbol to be displayed is determined (S607), the regular symbol win flag is turned ON (S608), and the process ends.

[Normal symbol random number shifting process]
As shown in Figure 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is subtracted by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each normal symbol reserved in the normal symbol reserved memory is shifted one position from the current position toward the read position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-level reserved memory in the normal symbol reserved memory, is cleared to 0, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal symbol reserved is cleared to 0 (S703), and the process ends. In this way, the normal symbol reserved balls are consumed in the order they are reserved.

[Processing during normal symbol variation]
As shown in Figure 18, in the normal symbol variation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (S801). If it has not elapsed (NO in S801), this process is terminated without performing the processes from S802 onwards. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol variation stop command is set (S802), and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processes are performed, such as stopping the normal symbol display (ending the normal symbol variation display) according to the display result (winning normal symbol or losing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the normal symbol win/loss determination random number (S804), and this process is terminated.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in Figure 19, in the normal symbol confirmation process (S406), it is first determined whether the normal symbol win flag is ON or NOT ON (S901). If the normal symbol win flag is NOT ON (NO in S901), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal symbol win flag is ON (YES in S901), it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON or NOT ON, that is, whether or not the time-saving state is active (S902). If the time-saving state is active (YES in S902), the opening pattern for the time-saving state is set as the opening pattern for the variable prize entry device 22 (second start opening 21) (S903). As mentioned above, the opening pattern for the time-saving state is an opening pattern that repeats an opening of 2.0 seconds three times. In response to this, S903 sets the opening pattern for the second start port 21 during the time-saving state, and also sets the second start port opening counter, which counts the number of times the second start port 21 has been opened, to "3".

In response to this, if the system is not in a time-saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the variable prize entry device 22 (second start port 21) is set to the opening pattern for the non-time-saving state (S906). As mentioned above, the opening pattern for the non-time-saving state is an opening pattern that performs one opening for 0.2 seconds. Corresponding to this, in S906, the opening pattern for the second start port 21 in the non-time-saving state is set, and the second start port opening counter, which counts the number of times the second start port 21 has been opened, is set to "1". Then, following the setting of the opening pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Standard electric processing of special features]
As shown in Figure 20, in the normal electric bonus processing (S407), it is first determined whether the normal win termination flag is ON or OFF (S1001). The normal win termination flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the second start opening 21 has ended in the auxiliary game that was executed as a win.

If the "Per Cycle End" flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is currently open (S1002). If it is not currently open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has been reached (S1003). If it has not been reached (NO in S1003), this process is terminated. If it has been reached (YES in S1003), the second start port 21 is opened (S1004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is open (YES in S1002), it is determined whether the time (timing) for closing the second start port 21 has arrived (i.e., whether a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the second start port 21 was opened) (S1005). If it has not arrived (NO in S1005), this process ends; if it has arrived (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (S1006).

Following the closing process of the second start gate 21 (S1006), the value of the second start gate open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second start gate open counter is "0" or not (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends immediately in order to reopen the second start gate 21. On the other hand, if the value of the second start gate open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the normal win termination process to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the normal win termination flag is set (S1010), ending the process. Note that the second start gate open counter becomes "0" when the second start gate 21 is opened (movement of the movable member 23 is opened) three times during the time-saving state, and becomes "0" when the second start gate 21 is opened once during the non-time-saving state.

In response to this, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal symbol completion flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. Therefore, the normal symbol completion flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal symbol hit flag is turned OFF (S1012), and the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S1013), ending this process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol waiting process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (S206).

[Special drawing operation processing]
As shown in Figure 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol operation processing (S207) following the regular symbol operation processing (S206). As shown in Figure 21, in the special symbol operation processing (S207), the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device 31 is divided into four stages, and one of the special symbol operation statuses "1" to "4" is assigned to each of these stages.

If the "Special Symbol Operation Status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed. If it is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), the special symbol variation process (S1104) is performed. If it is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol confirmation process (S1106) is performed. If it is "4" (NO in all of S1101, S1103, and S1105), the special electric mechanism process for a jackpot game (S1107) is performed. Note that the special symbol operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in Figure 22, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), it is first determined whether the number of balls held in the second starting port 21 (i.e., the number of balls held in special symbol 2) is "0" (S1201). If the number of balls held in special symbol 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value (acquired random value, acquired information) obtained due to balls entering the second starting port 21, it is determined whether the number of balls held in the first starting port 20 (i.e., the number of balls held in special symbol 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to balls entering the first start opening 20, it is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in the process of being set as a standby screen (execution of a demo screen for waiting customers) (S1211). If so (YES in S1211), this process is terminated without performing the process in S1212. Otherwise (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212). The standby screen includes the aforementioned performance setting screen (not shown).

In the standby screen setting process (S1212), if the number of reserved balls for special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 and number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) is "0" and no variable game is being played, a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) will elapse, and the standby screen will be displayed on the display screen 7a. The state in which the standby screen is displayed, that is, the state in which the number of reserved balls for special symbols is "0" and no variable game is being played, continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds), is also called the "standby state" or "customer waiting state."

If S1201 determines that the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more random number counter values (acquired random number values, acquired information) stored due to balls entering the second start opening 21, the following processes are performed in this order: Special Feature 2 win/failure determination process (S1202), Special Feature 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), Special Feature 2 random number shift process (S1204), and Special Feature 2 variation start process (S1205). Furthermore, if the number of balls held in Special Feature 2 is "0" but the number of balls held in Special Feature 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value related to the second start port 21, but there is a memory of one or more random number counter values (acquired random value, acquired information) obtained due to balls entering the first start port 20, then the following processes are performed in this order: Special Feature 1 win/fail determination process (S1207), Special Feature 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), Special Feature 1 random number shift process (S1209), and Special Feature 1 variation start process (S1210).

In this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol variation based on the first special symbol hold is performed only when the second special symbol hold is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, the consumption of the second special symbol hold (display of the second special symbol variation) takes precedence over the consumption of the first special symbol hold (display of the first special symbol variation). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the win/loss determination based on the second special symbol hold is more likely to result in a jackpot, which is more beneficial to the player, than the win/loss determination based on the first special symbol hold (see Figure 8(B)).

[Specific Figure 2 Correct/Incorrect Determination Process]
As shown in Figure 23, in the special symbol 2 win/failure determination process (S1202), first, the random value for special symbol win/failure determination (label-TRND-A) stored (the oldest stored value) in the lowest area of the RAM's second special symbol hold memory unit (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first second special symbol hold) is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON or not, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). If it is not in a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, in a normal state, the win/failure determination is made based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state (jackpot determination values are "3" and "397") from the jackpot determination table (see Figure 8(A)) (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1302), the win/failure determination is made based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state from the jackpot determination table (see Figure 8(A)) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are set to "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449", and "503".

If the result of the win/failure determination (S1303, S1304) is "Big Win" (YES in S1305), the random value for determining the type of big win (label-TRND-AS), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for determining the win/failure of the special symbol read in S1301, is read, and the type of big win is determined based on the big win type determination table shown in Figure 8(B) (S1307). Based on the value of the random value for determining the type of big win, the big win symbol is determined (S1308), the big win flag is turned ON (S1309), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the win/failure determination (S1303, S1304) is not "Big Win" ("Miss") (NO in S1305), the losing symbol is determined (S1306), and this process ends.

Here, when determining the type of jackpot, in the case of the win/failure determination related to the first special symbol (also called "Special Symbol 1 win/failure determination"), the type of jackpot is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. In the case of the win/failure determination related to the second special symbol (also called "Special Symbol 2 win/failure determination"), the type of jackpot is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. Note that the special symbol win/failure determination and the jackpot type determination can each be referred to as "determination," or the entire process, including which jackpot symbol is determined, can be referred to as "determination." Furthermore, these results are sometimes called "determination results."

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which performs the win/failure determination (S1303, S1304) related to the second special symbol, functions as a "special symbol 2 win/failure determination execution means." Furthermore, the win/failure determination (S1303, S1304) related to the second special symbol corresponds to the process of determining whether or not to control the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 to a jackpot game state (special game state). Therefore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which performs the win/failure determination (S1303, S1304) related to the second special symbol, also functions as a "special game determination means."

[Special Figure 2: Variation Pattern Selection Process]
As shown in Figure 22, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), following the special symbol 2 win/failure determination process (S1202), the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203). As shown in Figures 24 and 25, in the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), it is first determined whether the game state is a time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or OFF) (S1401). If it is determined that the game state is not a time-saving state (NO in S1401), i.e., if it is not a time-saving state, then it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or OFF (S1402).

Furthermore, in the non-time-saving state (low base state), the primary display of the first special symbol's variation is triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 20; therefore, the display of the second special symbol's variation is rare. Consequently, the process related to selecting (setting) the variation pattern of the second special symbol is rarely executed in the non-time-saving state. For example, if a second special symbol reserve is stored when the game state transitions from the time-saving state (high base state) to the non-time-saving state (low base state), that second special symbol reserve will be consumed in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the process related to selecting (setting) the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be executed in the non-time-saving state.

If the jackpot flag is determined to be ON in S1402 (YES in S1402), the random value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) in S308 is read along with the random value for determining the special symbol win/loss read in S1301, and a variation pattern is selected based on the non-time-saving jackpot table (the part of the non-time-saving variation pattern table shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to a jackpot) (S1403). In S1403, one of variation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In other words, when a jackpot variation is executed in a non-time-saving state, the variation pattern of that jackpot variation is determined to be one of P1 to P3. Once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols is "1" or "2" (S1405). In this process, the number of reserved symbols refers to the number of stored items, including the information used to determine the variation pattern. Therefore, the number of stored symbols is one of the values from "1" to "4".

If S1405 determines that the number of reserved balls is "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the random value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for determining the success or failure of the special symbol read in S1301, is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the first reserved ball miss table (the part of the variation pattern table for non-time-saving states shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to a miss and the number of reserved balls is "1" or "2") (S1406). In S1406, one of variation patterns P4 to P8 is selected. In other words, if a miss variation is executed in a non-time-saving state and the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is "1" or "2", the variation pattern for that miss variation is determined to be one of P4 to P8.

If S1405 determines that the number of reserved balls is not "1" or "2" (NO in S1405), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "3" (S1407). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "3" (YES in S1407), then the random value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for determining the success or failure of the special symbol read in S1301, is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the second reserved ball failure table (the part of the variation pattern table for non-time-saving states shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to failures and the number of reserved balls being "3") (S1408). In S1408, one of variation patterns P4-P7 or P9 is selected. In other words, if a failure variation is executed in a non-time-saving state and the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is "3", the variation pattern for that failure variation is determined to be one of P4-P7 or P9.

If S1407 determines that the number of reserved balls is not "3" (NO in S1407), i.e., if the number of reserved balls is "4", then the random value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for determining the success or failure of the special symbol read in S1301, is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the third reserved ball failure table (the part of the variation pattern table for non-time-saving states shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to failures and the number of reserved balls being "4") (S1409). In S1409, one of variation patterns P4-P7 or P10 is selected. In other words, if a failure variation is executed in a non-time-saving state and the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is "4", the variation pattern for that failure variation is determined to be one of P4-P7 or P10.

Here, the shortest variation pattern (12,000 ms) selectable in the first table for failed reserve counts is set to have a longer variation time compared to the second table (4,000 ms) and the third table (2,000 ms). Furthermore, the selectability (appearance rate) of variation patterns in the first table for failed reserve counts is set so that the variation time is relatively longer compared to the second and third tables. Therefore, when a failed variation is executed in a non-time-saving state, the variation time is relatively longer when the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is less than "3," while it becomes relatively shorter when the number of reserved balls is "3" or more, and even shorter when the number of reserved balls is "4." This makes it possible to efficiently process failed variations while minimizing interruptions in the variation display (variation gameplay).

Next, we will explain the process related to the selection (determination) of the special symbol 2 variation pattern in the time-saving state. Specifically, if it is determined in S1401 that the time-saving state is in effect (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or OFF (S1410). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1410), the random value for variation pattern determination (label-TRND-T1), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for special symbol win/loss determination read in S1301, is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the time-saving state jackpot table (the part of the time-saving state variation pattern table corresponding to jackpots shown in Figure 9B) (S1411). In S1411, one of variation patterns P11 to P13 is selected. In other words, when a jackpot variation is executed in the time-saving state, the variation pattern of that jackpot variation is determined to be one of P11 to P13.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is "1" (S1412). The number of reserved balls here is the same as described above, and the number of reserved balls is one of the values from "1" to "4". If it is determined in S1412 that the number of reserved balls is "1" (YES in S1412), the random value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit or miss read in S1301, is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the third reserved ball miss table (the part of the variation pattern table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 9B that corresponds to a miss and the number of reserved balls is "1") (S1413). In S1413, one of the variation patterns P14 to P17 is selected. In other words, if a losing spin occurs during a shortened time state and the number of reserved spins at the start of that spin is "1", the spin pattern for that losing spin will be determined to be one of P14 to P17.

If S1412 determines that the number of reserved balls is not "1" (NO in S1412), that is, if the number of reserved balls is any of "2" to "4", then the random value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1), which was acquired (stored) along with the random value for determining the success or failure of the special symbol read in S1301, is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the fourth reserved ball miss table (the part of the variation pattern table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 9B that corresponds to a miss and the number of reserved balls is "2 to 4") (S1414). In S1414, one of variation patterns P14 to P16 or P18 is selected. In other words, if a miss variation is executed in the time-saving state and the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is any of "2" to "4", then the variation pattern for that miss variation is determined to be one of P14 to P16 or P18.

Here, when a miss occurs during the time-saving mode, the selected variation pattern is more likely to be a shorter variation pattern (1000ms) compared to the variation pattern selected when a miss occurs in a non-time-saving mode. This is to speed up the processing of special symbol reserves (missing variations) during the time-saving mode. This allows for faster progression of the variation game during time-saving mode, making it possible to aim for a jackpot more efficiently.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the process is completed by performing other operations as shown in Figure 24 (S1404). In the other operations (S1404), operations such as setting a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the RAM output buffer are performed. The set variation pattern specification command is included in the variation start command described later and transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 via output processing (S201).

Furthermore, the types and number of special symbol variation patterns (also called "special symbol variation patterns") are not limited to those shown in this embodiment (see Figures 9A and 9B). The types and number of variation patterns can be increased or decreased compared to this embodiment, or any other configuration is possible.

[Special Feature 2: Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in Figure 26, in the Special Feature 2 random number shift processing (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 2 is subtracted by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second Special Feature reserved memory unit is shifted to one level lower (for example, if the second Special Feature reserved memory unit consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003", then to the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest-level address space of the second Special Feature reserved memory unit (S1503), and this process is completed.

After executing the Special Symbol 2 random number shift process (S1204), the Special Symbol 2 variation start process (S1205) is executed as shown in Figure 22. In the Special Symbol 2 variation start process (S1205), the Special Symbol operation status is set to "2," and the variation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to begin the variation display of the second special symbol.

[Specific Figure 1 Correct/False Determination Process]
As shown in Figure 27, the special symbol 1 win/failure determination process (S1207) is performed in the same manner as the special symbol 2 win/failure determination process (S1202) shown in Figure 23 (S1601 to S1609). Therefore, a detailed explanation of this process is omitted. However, since this process concerns special symbol 1, in S1601, the random value for special symbol win/failure determination stored in the lowest area of the first special symbol hold storage unit of the RAM (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first of the first special symbol holds) is read and processed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs the win/failure determination related to the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) functions as the "special symbol 1 win/failure determination execution means". Furthermore, the win/failure determination related to the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) corresponds to the process of deciding whether or not to control the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 to a jackpot game state (special game state). Therefore, the main control unit 80 (microcomputer 81 for game control) that performs the win/loss determination related to the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) also functions as a "special game determination means".

[Special Figure 1: Variation Pattern Selection Process]
As shown in Figures 28 and 29, the variable pattern selection process in Specifications 1 (S1208) follows the same flow as the variable pattern selection process in Specifications 2 (S1203) shown in Figures 24 and 25 (S1701 to S1714). Therefore, a detailed explanation of this process is omitted.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state (high base state), the display of the second special symbol variation is primarily triggered by balls entering the second start opening 21, so the display of the first special symbol variation is rare. Therefore, the process related to selecting (setting) the variation pattern of the first special symbol is rarely executed in the time-saving state. For example, if all second special symbol reserves have been consumed (number of balls held in special symbol 2 = "0") in the time-saving state (high base state) and the first special symbol reserve is stored, the first special symbol reserve will be consumed in the time-saving state. In this case, the process related to selecting (setting) the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be executed in the time-saving state.

Here, in the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208), the variation pattern for the variation display of the special symbols is determined based on the result of the win/fail judgment (the result of the determination by the special game determination means), the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation (the number of reserved information stored when the variation display starts), the random value for variation pattern determination acquired based on the initial ball entry (variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means), and the variation pattern determination value (predetermined determination information) of the variation pattern table. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208) functions as the "variation pattern determination means."

Furthermore, when determining the jackpot variation pattern based on the variation pattern table for non-time-saving states, if the random value for variation pattern determination obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0 to 74", the variation pattern is determined to be P1 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is "75 to 149", the variation pattern is determined to be P2 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is "150 to 198", the variation pattern is determined to be P3 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls (see Figure 9A). Therefore, in non-time-saving states, it is possible to produce a jackpot variation using any of variation patterns P1 to P3, regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance patterns of variation patterns P1 to P3.

Furthermore, when selecting (determining) a losing variation pattern based on the variation pattern table for non-time-saving states, if the random value for variation pattern determination obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0 to 3", the variation pattern is determined to be P4 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is "4 to 7", the variation pattern is determined to be P5 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is a value other than "0 to 7" ("8 to 198"), the variation pattern is determined to be one of P6 to P10 depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls (see Figure 9A). Therefore, in non-time-saving states, it is possible to produce losing variations using variation patterns P4 or P5 regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, while it is possible to produce losing variations using any of variation patterns P6 to P10 depending on the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance patterns of variation patterns P4 and P5, and to adjust the appearance patterns of variation patterns P6 to P10 according to the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation.

Furthermore, when determining the jackpot variation pattern based on the variation pattern table for the time-saving state, if the random value for variation pattern determination obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0 to 69", the variation pattern is determined to be P11 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is "70 to 139", the variation pattern is determined to be P12 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is "140 to 198", the variation pattern is determined to be P13 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls (see Figure 9B). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is possible to produce a jackpot variation using any of variation patterns P11 to P13, regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance patterns of variation patterns P11 to P13.

Furthermore, when selecting (determining) a losing variation pattern based on the variation pattern table for the time-saving state, if the random value for variation pattern determination obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0 to 1", the variation pattern is determined to be P14 regardless of the number of special symbol reserved balls. If the random value for variation pattern determination is a value other than "0 to 1" ("2 to 198"), the variation pattern is determined to be one of P15 to P18 depending on the number of special symbol reserved balls (see Figure 9B). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is possible to produce a losing variation using variation pattern P14 regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, while it is possible to produce a losing variation using any of variation patterns P15 to P18 depending on the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance pattern of variation pattern P14, and to adjust the appearance pattern of variation patterns P15 to P18 according to the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation.

[Special Feature 1: Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in Figure 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is subtracted by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reserved memory unit is shifted one position lower (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reserved memory unit (S1803), and this process is completed.

After executing the Special Symbol 1 random number shift process (S1209), the Special Symbol 1 variation start process (S1210) is executed as shown in Figure 22. In the Special Symbol 1 variation start process (S1210), the Special Symbol operation status is set to "2," and the variation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to begin the variation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol variation processing]
As shown in Figure 31, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), it is first determined whether the variation time for the special symbol, that is, the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 (see Figure 9), has elapsed (S1901). If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process is terminated without performing the processes from S1902 onwards. As a result, the variation display of the special symbol continues.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON or not (S1903). If it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not (S1905). If it is determined that the probability variation counter is "0" (YES in S1905), the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to S1907. The high probability state (probability variation state) ends with the process in S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1903 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or if it is determined in S1905 that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

In S1907, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1907). If the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of times the special symbols were displayed during the time-saving state, is decremented by 1 (S1908). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1909). If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1909), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911. The time-saving state (and high base state) ends after the process in S1910. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1907 that the time-saving flag is NOT ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined in S1909 that the value of the time-saving counter is NOT "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special symbol operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processes are performed, such as stopping the special symbol display (ending the display of the special symbol's variation) based on the display result corresponding to the determination of the special symbol win/loss random number and the jackpot type determination random number (S1912), and this process ends. When the game control microcomputer 81 stops (ends) the display of the special symbol's variation, it sets the stop display time (stop display period) for the special symbol (stopped symbol). Then, when the set stop display time (stop display period) has elapsed, the special symbol confirmation process (S1106) is performed.

Furthermore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes processes (S1906, S1910) to turn off the probability variation flag based on the probability variation counter value becoming "0", and to turn off the time reduction flag based on the time reduction counter value becoming "0", functions as a "game state control means".

[Special Symbol Confirmation Process]
As shown in Figure 32, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or NOT ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether the confirmed jackpot (this jackpot) is a 10R jackpot (S2002). If it is determined to be a 10R jackpot (YES in S2002), the value of the round counter, which counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game, is set to "10" (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the jackpot is NOT a 10R jackpot (NO in S2002), then the value of the round counter is set to "5" (S2004), since the confirmed jackpot (this jackpot) is a 5R jackpot, and the process proceeds to S2009.

In S2009, the opening pattern for the large prize slot is set according to the confirmed type of jackpot (jackpot category), and the process proceeds to S2010. As mentioned earlier, the opening pattern for the large prize slot is determined according to the jackpot category (see Figure 6). Therefore, in S2009, the opening pattern for the large prize slot (long opening, short opening, number of openings, etc.) corresponding to the confirmed jackpot is set. Then, the opening operation of the large prize slot 30, based on the opening pattern set in S2009, is executed during the jackpot game (special game).

In S2010, the opening command for the jackpot is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). In this embodiment, there are a total of six opening commands: the first opening command corresponding to the 10R 1st jackpot, the second opening command corresponding to the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, the third opening command corresponding to the 5R 6th jackpot, the fourth opening command corresponding to the 5R 7th jackpot, the fifth opening command corresponding to the 10R 8th jackpot, and the sixth opening command corresponding to the 10R 9th jackpot.

In S2010, an opening command is set according to the type of jackpot (the jackpot to begin) that has been determined. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) then transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing via output processing (S201). Upon receiving the opening command, the sub-control unit 90 performs execution processing of a predetermined opening sequence based on the command. In this embodiment, the opening command corresponding to the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots is a common command (2nd opening command), and the opening sequence is common (similar sequence) for the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots. This is because, considering the gameplay of RUB, that is, the gameplay that draws the player's attention to how long the long-open rounds will continue, it is made difficult for the player to determine the type of jackpot through the opening sequence and other jackpot (special jackpot) related sequences.

Next, the opening period for the jackpot game is started (S2011), and the special symbol operation status is set to "4" (S2012). Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special symbol operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends.

The opening period is the period before the initial opening of the large prize slot in a jackpot game, and is set after the display time of the special symbol (performance symbol) that stopped on the jackpot symbol (also called the "display period" or "confirmed stop period"). During this period, the display of the special symbol (performance symbol) is disabled. The opening period is also called the "start period," and the performance (opening performance) executed during the opening period (start period) is also called the "start performance." In this embodiment, the opening period is included in the special game state. However, the opening period may be excluded from the special game state.

In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) is determined by the type of jackpot that has been confirmed and the game state at the time the jackpot is confirmed (when the jackpot symbols are displayed). The opening period can be specified by the aforementioned opening command. Therefore, the sub-control unit 90, upon receiving the opening command, can perform an opening sequence based on the jackpot type and opening period specified by the opening command. The length of the opening period (opening time) is generally set to a length sufficient to allow the player to recognize that a jackpot game has begun; for example, it can be longer than the jackpot display time. Furthermore, the length of the opening period (opening time) may be varied depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot and the type of jackpot.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the special symbol waiting process (S1102), the special symbol variation process (S1104), and the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), functions as a "variable game execution means."

[Special Electric Mechanism Processing (Big Win Game)]
As shown in Figure 33, in the special electric bonus processing (S1107), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON or not (S2101). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102). Next, it is determined whether the time reduction flag is ON or not (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If it is determined in S2101 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the probability variation flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2103 without performing the process in S2102. Furthermore, if it is determined in S2103 that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S2103), the time-saving flag is OFF, and the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the S2104 process. In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the system is controlled to be in a low probability state and a non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, since the system is always in a low base state during the non-time-saving state, the system is also controlled to be in a low base state during the execution of a jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot completion flag is ON or OFF (S2105). The jackpot completion flag indicates that all operations of the jackpot winning device 31 (the opening of the jackpot winning opening 30) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended). If the jackpot completion flag is NOT ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether it is the start of a round (S2106). This is determined based on the jackpot winning opening pattern set for each type of jackpot, as described above. For example, before the start of the first round, it is determined by whether the opening period has ended and it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round. Also, if the first round has already started, it is determined by whether the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval time has elapsed (the interval period has ended).

If it is determined in S2106 that it is time to start a round (YES in S2106), the round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and the big prize opening process is performed (S2108). This causes the big prize opening 30 to open, and the predetermined round begins. In S2107, a round start command is set that specifies the round to start; for example, "1R Start Command" for the start of the first round, and "2R Start Command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 via the output process in S201. Furthermore, in the big prize opening process in S2108, the opening/closing member 32 is operated (opened) to open the big prize opening 30 based on the big prize opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot being executed, that is, the big prize opening pattern set in S2009.

If S2106 determines that it is not the start of a round (S2106 is NO), the process proceeds to S2112. Examples of times when it is determined that it is not the start of a round include the opening period before the start of a round, during round play, and during the interval period after the end of round play (while the big prize slot is being closed).

In S2112, it is determined whether the large prize slot opening operation is currently in progress, that is, whether the large prize slot opened by the process in S2108 is still open (round game in progress) (S2112). If it is determined that the large prize slot opening operation is not in progress (round game in progress) (NO in S2112), the process proceeds to S2116. If it is determined that the large prize slot opening operation is in progress (round game in progress) (YES in S2112), it is determined whether the termination condition for the ongoing round game (round termination condition) has been met (S2113).

In this embodiment, the round termination conditions are defined as follows: (1) the opening time of the large prize slot (e.g., 25 seconds) predetermined for the round game being played has elapsed; and (2) a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have entered the large prize slot during the round game being played. When either condition is met first, the round termination condition is met based on the condition that was met first. If it is determined in S2113 that the round termination condition has not been met (NO in S2113), the process ends.

If the round termination condition is determined to be met in S2113 (YES in S2113), the round termination command for the corresponding round is set (S2114), and the process proceeds to S2115. In S2114, a round termination command that specifies the round ending is set; for example, "1R Termination Command" for the end of the first round, and "2R Termination Command" for the end of the second round. The set round termination command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 via the output processing in S201.

In S2115, the large prize opening closing process is performed, and the opening/closing member 32 of the large prize opening 30 is operated (closed), closing the large prize opening 30 (S2115). Furthermore, in the large prize opening closing process (S2115), the closing time, i.e., the interval time, is set to maintain the large prize opening 30 in the closed state. As described above, in this embodiment, a first interval time (for example, approximately 3 to 5 seconds) and a second interval time (for example, approximately 0.5 to 1 second) are provided. Therefore, the first or second interval time is set according to the type of jackpot game being played and the number of rounds in the completed round game (S2115).

Next, in S2116, it is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S2116). If it is determined that the time has not elapsed (the interval period is still ongoing) (NO in S2116), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2118). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), the process ends as a jackpot termination process to end the jackpot game. This includes setting the jackpot ending command (S2119), starting the jackpot ending period (S2120), turning on the jackpot termination flag (S2121), and ending the process. The round counter value will reset to "0" once all rounds of the winning game have finished.

In S2119, an ending command is selected from a predetermined set of ending commands, based on the game state at the time of the jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot. The selected command is then set. The type of ending command set determines the ending period (ending time) that is executed (set). The ending period is the period after all opening operations of the jackpot winning slot 30 have been completed, and before the special symbols (effect symbols) can be displayed. The ending period is also called the "end period." During the ending period (end period), the jackpot winning slot 30 is in a closed state. The effects performed during the ending period (end period) are also called the "ending effects" or "end effects." In this embodiment, the ending period is included in the special game state. However, the ending period may not be included in the special game state.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the ending command set in S2119 to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing via output processing (S201). Upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 then performs the execution of a predetermined ending sequence based on the ending command.

If the jackpot end flag is determined to be ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round of the jackpot game has ended. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed, that is, whether the ending period started in the S2120 process has ended (S2122). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and the game state setting process (S2124), described later, is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special symbol operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and this process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol waiting process (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation process (S207).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs the above special electric bonus mechanism processing (S1107) functions as a "special game execution means."

[Game state setting process]
As shown in Figure 34, in the game state setting process (S2124), it is first determined whether the jackpot game that has just ended is a probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as mentioned above, there are three types of probability variation jackpots: the 10R first jackpot, the 5R second jackpot, and the 10R fourth jackpot. Therefore, in S2201, it is determined whether the game that has just ended is one of these three types. If it is determined that the game that has just ended is a probability variation jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variation counter is set to "10,000" (S2203), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2204), the time reduction counter is set to "10,000" (S2205), and the process is completed.

Here, the value set in the probability variation counter is the number of times the special symbol win/loss judgment (in other words, the display of the special symbol variation) can be performed in the high probability state. The value of "10,000" (10,000 times) set in this embodiment is, considering the probability of a big win in the high probability state, the operating hours of the amusement parlor, and the number of special symbol win/loss judgments that can be performed within those operating hours, essentially guaranteeing the high probability state until the next big win occurs or until the end of business hours. Therefore, it can be said that when the game state is set to the high probability state, the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big win occurs (it is essentially the same thing). Also, when the probability variation flag is ON, "10,000" is similarly set in the time reduction counter, so it can be said that the time reduction state (open extension state) is also set while this high probability state is set. In other words, when the big win game related to the probability variation big win ends, the game state becomes the "high probability high base state" (second game state). Furthermore, as in this embodiment, the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter may be set to the value "10,000" to effectively set a high probability, high base state until the next big win. Alternatively, if the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON, a control system may be adopted that sets a high probability, high base state until the next big win occurs without setting values in the counters.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that it is not a probability-increasing jackpot (NO in S2201), that is, if the jackpot game that has ended is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot), the probability-increasing flag is not turned ON, but the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2206), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S2207), and the process ends. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, two types of jackpots, the 5R third jackpot and the 10R fifth jackpot, are considered non-probability-increasing jackpots (normal jackpots). Therefore, when a jackpot game related to either of these two types ends, the game state becomes the "low probability high base state" (first game state). The low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times (the special symbol win/loss judgment is performed 100 times), or the next jackpot occurs.

The time-saving counter and the probability-changing counter count the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The values set for the time-saving counter and the probability-changing counter are not limited to this embodiment and can be arbitrarily determined considering the gameplay, payout performance, specifications, etc., of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, different values may be set for each counter.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the above game state setting process (S2124), functions as a "game state control means."

[Handling of held balls]
As shown in Figure 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball count processing (S208) following the special symbol operation processing (S207). As shown in Figure 35, in the reserved ball count processing (S208), first, the reserved ball count for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 is read (S2501). Next, command data including information (storage information) indicating the read reserved ball count is generated as a reserved ball count command, and this command is set in the RAM output buffer (S2502). Reserved ball count commands are provided for each of the reserved ball counts for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol, and there are special symbol 1 reserved ball count commands, special symbol 2 reserved ball count commands, and normal symbol reserved ball count commands. Either the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command or the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command, or both, are referred to as the "special symbol reserved ball count command". The reserved ball count command (storage information) set in S2502 is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output processing (S201) in the next interrupt processing (S105).

Upon receiving a reserved ball count command, the sub-control unit 90 analyzes the received command to determine the current number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1, Special Feature 2, and regular symbols. If it determines that there has been an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls for Special Feature symbols based on the received command, it updates the display content of the performance reserve display areas (first performance reserve display area 9c, second performance reserve display area 9d, and variable reserve display area 9e) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 accordingly. Specifically, for example, if the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 increases by 1 from "3" to "4", the first performance reserve 9a corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1, "4", is added and displayed in the first performance reserve display area 9c. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 decreases from "2" to "1" (i.e., when the first reserved ball in Special Feature 1 is consumed), the first reserved ball 9a displayed at the left edge of the first reserved ball display area 9c (corresponding to the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 being "1"; see Figure 3) is moved to the variable reserved ball display area 9e. Consequently, the first reserved ball 9a displayed in the first reserved ball display area 9c is shifted one position to the left (in the direction of decreasing reserved ball count).

When the number of special-feature reserved balls is increased by S307 or S311 as described above, the special-feature reserved ball count command, that is, the special-feature reserved ball count command associated with the occurrence of a starting ball entry, is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) via output processing (S201) together with the special-feature 1 starting ball entry command set in S323 (in the same interrupt) if the special-feature reserved ball count command is a special-feature 1 reserved ball count command (a command caused by S311). If it is a special-feature 2 reserved ball count command (a command caused by S307), it is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) via output processing (S201) together with the special-feature 2 starting ball entry command set in S318 (in the same interrupt). This allows the sub-control unit 90 to receive the special-feature reserved ball count command along with the starting ball entry command, and to link the special-feature reserved ball count (storage information) included in the special-feature reserved ball count command with the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination result information) included in the starting ball entry command, and process them on the sub-control unit 90 side.

Furthermore, information indicating the number of special symbol reserved balls when the number of special symbol reserved balls is increased, that is, information indicating the number of special symbol reserved balls associated with the start ball entry, may be included in the start ball entry command. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a special symbol reserved ball count command associated with the start ball entry, thus reducing the number of commands transmitted from the main control unit 80 to the sub-control unit 90. Also, information indicating the number of special symbol reserved balls when the number of special symbol reserved balls is decreased, that is, information indicating the number of special symbol reserved balls associated with the start of the special symbol variation (special symbol reserved ball consumption), may be included in the variation start command. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a special symbol reserved ball count command associated with the start of the variation, thus reducing the number of commands transmitted from the main control unit 80 to the sub-control unit 90. These points also apply to ordinary symbols.

[Power outage monitoring process]
As shown in Figure 11, the microcomputer 81 for game control performs power outage monitoring processing (S209) following the processing of the number of reserved balls (S208). As shown in Figure 36, in the power outage monitoring processing (S209), it first determines whether or not a power outage signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if a power outage signal is input (YES in S2601), data regarding the current state of the game machine (whether or not it is in a probability variation mode, whether or not it is in a winning game, how many reserved balls there are, how many remaining variations there are in probability variation/short time mode, etc.) is stored in RAM (S2602), the power outage flag is turned ON (S2603), and then the loop processing continues without returning to the interrupt processing (S105).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the performance control microcontroller 91 (performance control means) (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be explained based on Figures 37 to 43. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcontroller 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit).

When the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on and power is supplied to the machine, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads the sub-control main processing program shown in Figure 37 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. Upon power-on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. Based on the receipt of this power-on command, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads the sub-control main processing program from the ROM of the sub-control board 90.

As shown in Figure 37, the sub-control main process first performs CPU initialization (S4001). The CPU initialization process (S4001) includes setting the stack, constants, CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), and resetting various flags, statuses, and counters.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and whether the contents of the RAM on the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM (predetermined storage area) of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the result of this determination is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the power-off signal is ON but the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. However, if the power-off signal is ON due to a power outage, etc., but the contents of the RAM are normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses, and counters.

Furthermore, the RAM (predetermined memory area) of the sub-control board 90 is initialized when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is pressed when the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed (when a RAM clear command is received). This initialization (RAM clear) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 corresponds to one aspect of the "initialization process that initializes the contents of the predetermined memory area," and the microcontroller 91 for performance control that executes the initialization (RAM clear) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 corresponds to one aspect of the "initialization process execution means."

Furthermore, the processes S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after power-on (when power is turned on) and are not executed thereafter. That is, as mentioned above, when power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 (if the RAM clear switch is pressed, a RAM clear command is also sent), so the performance control microcontroller 91 executes the processes S4001 to S4003 based on the reception of the power-on command (and RAM clear command). In this embodiment, the performance control microcontroller 91 also performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcontroller 81 shown in Figure 11, so that when a power-off signal is turned ON due to a power outage or the like, the data related to performance control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, the data related to performance control in the event of a power outage or the like is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) upon power restoration after a power outage or other power interruption, the state of the performance control by the performance control microcontroller 91 will revert to the state before the power outage occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). The random number seed update process (S4005) updates the values of various random number counters used to determine the game's effects. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers used to determine the game's effects include random numbers for determining the type of game effect (variable effect pattern) to be executed, random numbers for determining the pre-announcement effect, and random numbers for determining the effect symbols. The method for updating the random numbers can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, instead of incrementing the random value by 1, it may be incremented by 2, for example.

The random numbers used to determine the animation are acquired at predetermined timings. These timings could include, for example, when a control signal (start ball entry command) indicating a ball entry has occurred from the main control board 80, when a control signal (start variation command) indicating the start of variation is transmitted from the main control board 80, or when determining the variation animation pattern described later. The acquired random numbers for determining the animation are stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

After the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also called the "sub-output buffer") in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the corresponding control board among the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives a command then executes various effects (such as effect symbol game effects and special game effects) using various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, and movable effect member 14, etc.) according to the received command.

The microcontroller 91 for performance control then enables interrupts (S4007). From this point onward, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, the following can be executed: received interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010). By executing these control processes, it becomes possible to control the display of images (display objects) on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (display performance control), the illumination of various lamps (illumination performance control), the operation of movable performance components 14 (movable performance control), and the sound output from the speaker 67 (sound performance control), all in accordance with the progress of the game.

[Receive interrupt handling]
As shown in Figure 38, the receive interrupt processing (S4008) determines whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or NOT ON, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 has been input to the external INT input of the microcontroller 91 for performance control (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is NOT ON (NO in S4101), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the strobe signal is determined to be ON (YES in S4101), the various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and this process ends. This receive interrupt processing (S4008) takes precedence over other interrupt processing (S4009, S4010).

[2ms Timer Interrupt Processing]
The 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in Figure 39, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) first performs input processing to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the performance button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, it performs lamp data output processing (S4202) to output lamp data for illuminating various lamps (illumination components) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and drive data output processing (S4203) to output drive data for operating the movable performance component 14 (driving the drive means). Note that the lamp data and drive data are created in the 10ms timer interrupt processing described later. Finally, it performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt handling]
The 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in Figure 40, the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) first performs the received command analysis processing (S4302), which will be described later. Next, it performs a switch state acquisition process (S4303) to store the switch data created in the 2ms timer interrupt processing as switch data for the 10ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, and then performs a switch processing (S4304) to set the display content of the display screen 7a based on the stored switch data. Finally, it performs other processes such as creating lamp data to make the illuminated components light up, creating drive data to operate the movable performance components 14 (driving the drive means), and updating the random number for determining the performance (S4305), and then finishes this process.

The drive data for the movable performance component 14 is created based on the operation pattern (movable performance pattern) of the movable performance component 14 included in the preview performance pattern, when the variation performance pattern set in S4505 (described later) or the preview performance pattern set in S4506 (described later) includes the operation (movable performance) of the movable performance component 14. Furthermore, the lamp data for the movable lamp 15 among the lighting components is created based on the variation performance pattern set in S4505 (described later) and the operation pattern (movable performance pattern) of the movable performance component 14, etc.

[Received command parsing process]
As shown in Figure 41, in the received command analysis process (S4302), it is first determined whether or not a start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4390). If it is determined that a start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4390), the processes S4395 to S4400 are performed and the process moves on to S4401. On the other hand, if it is determined that a start ball entry command has not been received (NO in S4390), the process moves on to S4401 without performing the processes S4395 to S4400.

The S4395 performance hold information storage process stores information based on the start ball entry command (special feature 1 start ball entry command or special feature 2 start ball entry command) received in S4390 as performance hold information in a predetermined performance hold information storage area provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The performance hold information stored in the performance hold information storage area is used to execute various performances, such as variable performances,予告 performances, and performance modes, as described later.

As shown in Figure 67, the performance hold information storage area has first storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the first special symbol and second storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the second special symbol. Each storage area is provided with a region for storing pre-determination result information (win/loss pre-determination result information, jackpot type pre-determination result information, variation pattern pre-determination result information) that can be identified based on the start ball entry command.

The first memory areas 1 to 4 are provided according to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for Special Symbol 1 (in this embodiment, "4"). When a Special Symbol 1 start ball entry command is received, information (command data) based on the received Special Symbol 1 start ball entry command is stored sequentially in the first memory area, starting from 1. Each time the variation display of the first special symbol begins (consumption of the first special symbol reserved balls), the information in the first memory area 1 is deleted. At this time, if information is stored in the first memory area 2, that information is shifted to the first memory area 1; if information is stored in the first memory area 3, that information is shifted to the first memory area 2; and if information is stored in the first memory area 4, that information is shifted to the first memory area 3.

The second memory areas 1 to 4 are provided according to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol 2 (in this embodiment, "4"). When a Special Symbol 2 start ball entry command is received, information (command data) based on the received Special Symbol 2 start ball entry command is stored sequentially in the second memory area, starting from 1. Each time the variation display of the second special symbol begins (consumption of the second special symbol reserved balls), the information in the second memory area 1 is deleted. At this time, if information is stored in the second memory area 2, that information is shifted to the second memory area 1; if information is stored in the second memory area 3, that information is shifted to the second memory area 2; and if information is stored in the second memory area 4, that information is shifted to the second memory area 3.

The microcontroller 91 for controlling the game's effects, upon performing the effect hold information storage process (S4395), checks whether there are any abnormalities in the storage (storage content) of the effect hold information resulting from that process. Specifically, it checks for any storage errors (missed commands) based on the received start ball entry command, any inconsistencies between the number of special feature hold balls that can be identified based on the special feature hold ball count command received along with the start ball entry command, and the storage (storage location, number of stored items) of the pre-determination result information, as well as any missed special feature hold ball count commands.

For example, if the area storing the new pre-determination result information based on the received start ball entry command is "First Storage Area 3," and the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1, specified based on the Special Feature 1 reserved ball count command received along with the start ball entry command, is "3," then the stored pre-determination result information and the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1 are consistent. Therefore, it can be determined that the storage of the reserved performance information by the current performance reserved information storage process (S4395) was performed normally (no abnormalities).

In contrast, for example, if the number of reserved balls for Special Feature 1, as determined by the Special Feature 1 reserved ball count command, is "3," but no pre-determination result information is stored in the first memory area 3 (the first memory area 3 is empty), or if the first memory area 3 stores the win/fail pre-determination result information but not the variation pattern pre-determination result information, or vice versa, then if some or all of the pre-determination result information based on the start ball entry command is not stored in the corresponding memory area, it is possible that the start ball entry command was missed or the command was corrupted, and it can be determined that the storage of the performance reserved information by the performance reserved information storage process (S4395) was not performed correctly (an abnormality occurred).

Furthermore, for example, if new pre-judgment result information based on the received start ball entry command is stored, but the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 at the time of storage cannot be determined, or if the area where the new pre-judgment result information is stored does not match the number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 determined based on the received Special Feature 1 reserved ball count command (for example, if the area where the new pre-judgment result information is stored is "First Storage Area 3" and the determined number of reserved balls in Special Feature 1 is "2"), then a missed reserved ball count command or command corruption may be suspected, and it can be determined that the storage of the reserved ball information by the current performance reserved information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally (an abnormality occurred).

Furthermore, if, despite performing the performance hold information storage process (S4395) (receiving the start ball entry command), some or all of the new pre-determination result information based on the start ball entry command is not stored in the corresponding storage area, and the number of special feature hold balls cannot be identified, then it is possible that both the start ball entry command and the hold ball count command were missed or corrupted, and it can be determined that the storage of performance hold information by the performance hold information storage process (S4395) in this case was not performed correctly (an abnormality occurred).

If the process of storing performance hold information (S4395) is performed and it is confirmed that there is an abnormality in the storage (storage content) of the performance hold information (S4397 is YES), that is, if there is an abnormality in at least one of the start ball entry command (pre-determination result information) received in S4390 and the special symbol hold ball count command (storage information) received together with the start ball entry command, the予告演出限定旗 (pre-announcement performance restriction flag) is turned ON (S4399), and the process proceeds to S4400. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the information storage performed by the performance hold information storage process (S4395) (S4397 is NO), the process proceeds to S4400 without performing the process in S4399.

Here, the preview effect restriction flag is a flag used to restrict the execution of effects (preview effects, etc.) based on the effect hold information stored in the effect hold information storage area, i.e., the pre-determination result information. When the preview effect restriction flag is OFF, the execution of effects based on the pre-determination result information is permitted (effects based on the pre-determination result information can be executed), and when it is ON, the execution of effects based on the pre-determination result information is restricted (prohibited) (effects based on the pre-determination result information cannot be executed).

If an abnormality is detected in the information storage process (S4395) for performance hold information, and a performance based on the pre-determined result information is performed, there is a risk that the performance content may contain errors (misinformation), potentially misleading the player. In this embodiment, however, if an abnormality is detected in the information storage process (S4395) for performance hold information, the execution of performances based on the pre-determined result information is restricted. This prevents performances that could mislead the player (performances based on misinformation). This avoids compromising the reliability of the performances and suppresses a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, after the notification performance restriction flag is turned ON, that state (notification performance restriction state) is maintained until a predetermined restriction release condition is met. When the restriction release condition is met, the notification performance restriction flag is turned OFF, and the execution of performances based on the pre-determination result information is permitted (made possible). Specifically, after the notification performance restriction flag is turned ON, if no abnormality is found in the storage of performance hold information based on the reception of the start ball entry command (the storage of performance hold information is performed normally) until the start ball entry command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) (i.e., until the special symbol variation display based on a new start ball is performed a predetermined number of times), or if the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on again, the restriction release condition is met and the notification performance restriction flag is turned OFF. In other words, the restriction release condition is that no abnormality is found in the storage of performance hold information until the start ball entry command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), or the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on again. Furthermore, the conditions for lifting the restriction are not limited to these. For example, when an abnormality is detected in the memory of the performance hold information (when the pre-announcement performance restriction flag is turned ON), all stored special symbol holds may be consumed. Alternatively, when an abnormality is detected in the memory of the performance hold information, the special symbol variation display may be performed a number of times equal to the number of stored special symbol holds (number of special symbol hold balls) + α (α = 1 or more).

The contents of the performance hold information storage area (performance hold information) are consistent with the contents of the special feature hold storage unit (first special feature hold storage unit, second special feature hold storage unit) of the main control board 80 (acquired information, hold information), and their meanings are the same. Therefore, the performance hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be considered an "acquired information storage means" or a "hold storage means."

The information regarding the pending performance is also called "pre-read information," the pending performance information for Special Feature 1 is also called "first pre-read information," and the pending performance information for Special Feature 2 is also called "second pre-read information." Furthermore, the memory area for the pending performance information is also called the "pre-read information storage means," the memory area for the pending performance information for Special Feature 1 is also called the "first pre-read information storage means," and the memory area for the pending performance information for Special Feature 2 is also called the "second pre-read information storage means."

The S4400 hold icon notification process is a type of notification effect based on the performance hold information (pre-judgment result information) stored in S4395, specifically the hold icon notification. A hold icon notification is an effect that displays the performance hold (hold icon) on the display screen 7a in a different display mode than usual (also called a "notification display mode"), suggesting the possibility (expectation level) of a big win based on this notification display mode. The hold icon notification is also called a "hold change notification" or "specific effect." The hold icon notification is a type of display effect performed on the display screen 7a. The hold icon notification process (S4400) will be described later.

In S4401, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the variation effect start process (S4402), described later, is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. If it is determined that a variation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4403 without performing the process in S4402.

In S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation performance termination process is performed to stop the display of the performance symbols and end the variation performance (S4404). In the variation performance termination process (S4404), a variation performance termination command to stop displaying the performance symbols 8 and end the variation performance is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variation performance termination command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops displaying the performance symbols 8 that were being displayed in a variation on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (confirmed stop), and ends the variation performance (performance symbol game performance). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4403 that a variation stop command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the process in S4404.

The sub-control unit 90 (microcontroller 91 for performance control), which executes the variable performance start process (S4402) and the variable performance end process (S4404), also functions as a "variable game execution means." The variable performance refers to various effects performed in conjunction with the variable game, from the start to the end (stop display) of the special symbols' variable display, including the display of the variable and stop of the performance symbols 8, and the reach effects described later. The variable performance performed on the display screen 7a is a type of display effect.

In S4405, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). Jackpot game-related commands are commands transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing a jackpot game. Specifically, these include the opening command transmitted at the start of a jackpot game (when a jackpot occurs) (see S2010), the round start command transmitted at the start of a round (see S2107), the round end command transmitted at the end of a round (see S2114), and the ending command transmitted at the end of a jackpot game (see S2119). In S4405, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands have been received. If not received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407. If received (YES in S4405), the jackpot game-related performance processing related to the execution of the performance corresponding to the type of command received is performed (S4406).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening animation command specifying the opening animation corresponding to the type of jackpot identified based on that command is set in the sub-output buffer. If it is a round start command, a round animation command specifying the round animation corresponding to the round identified based on that command is set in the sub-output buffer. If it is an ending command, an ending animation command specifying the ending animation corresponding to the type of jackpot identified based on that command is set in the sub-output buffer. When these set jackpot-related animation commands are transmitted to the image control board 100 via command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 executes jackpot-related animations (also called "jackpot game animations" or "jackpot game-related animations") such as opening animations, round animations, and ending animations on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game. The jackpot game animations (jackpot game-related animations) performed on the display screen 7a are a type of display animation.

Finally, the process in S4407 is performed, and this process is completed. In S4407, other processing is performed, such as processing based on other received commands (e.g., the normal symbol change start command and the normal symbol change stop command), excluding the various commands mentioned above.

[Start of variation effect processing]
Next, the variable animation start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be explained. As shown in Figure 42, in the variable animation start process (S4402), first, a random number processing for determining animations is performed to acquire various random numbers for determining animations, such as random numbers for determining variable animations, random numbers for determining予告 animations, and random numbers for determining animation symbols (S4501). In this embodiment, the processing in S4501 is performed when a variable start command is received from the main control unit 80, and predetermined values (acquired information) are obtained from each random number. Based on these acquired values (acquired information), the type of animation symbol game animation (variable animation) to be executed, the animation symbols to be stopped and displayed, whether or not to execute a予告 animation, and the type of予告 animation if one is executed are determined.

Next, in S4502, the variation start command received in S4401 is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process for the first or second special symbol. The information specifying the variation pattern includes information indicating the type of variation pattern (P1 to P18) (see Figures 9A and 9B), game state information specifying the current game state, the judgment result of the first special symbol win/fail judgment or the second special symbol win/fail judgment, and symbol information specifying the type of jackpot (see Figure 8). Furthermore, since there are variation pattern specification commands corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, it is possible to determine whether the performance symbol game performance (variation display of performance symbols) to be started this time relates to special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Note that the variation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in processes other than the variation performance start process executed from here on.

Next, in S4503, the current mode status is referenced (S4503). The mode status determines the performance mode to be executed. The mode status is one of five values, from "1" to "5," and each value is assigned to a performance mode A through E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to performance mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to performance mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to performance mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to performance mode D, and mode status "5" corresponds to performance mode E. By referencing the current mode status, the current performance mode can be identified.

Here, "performance mode" refers to the performance format (performance environment) when a variable game is being played (variable game state). Different performance modes result in some or all of the performance characteristics of various display effects, such as the background of the display screen 7a, variable effects, reach effects, and予告 effects. Specifically, the display characteristics of the performance symbols 8 (e.g., symbol design, number design, etc.) may differ, or the characters, items, and background images that appear may differ. In other words, some or all of the performance images (performance displays) displayed on the image display device 7 will differ depending on the performance mode. Furthermore, performance symbol game effects and jackpot game effects can also be executed in a manner corresponding to the performance mode. When multiple game effects (such as予告 effects, reach effects, and round effects) are provided, it is possible to execute different game effects depending on the performance mode. The performance mode is also referred to as the "variable mode."

In this embodiment, performance modes A and B are performance modes that can be executed when the game state is a low probability low base state, performance mode C is a performance mode that can be executed when the game state is a low probability high base state, performance mode D is a performance mode that can be executed when the game state is a high probability high base state, and performance mode E is a performance mode that can be executed in both the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state. Therefore, when the performance mode is one of "A" to "D", the player can understand whether the current game state is a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state (time-saving state), or a high probability high base state (probability variation game state) by checking the performance mode. On the other hand, when the performance mode is "E", it is difficult (impossible) for the player to understand (determine) whether the current game state is a low probability high base state (time-saving state) or a high probability high base state (probability variation game state) even if they check the performance mode. In that sense, presentation mode E can be described as a "non-notification mode for game status."

Returning to Figure 42, in S4504, an unillustrated variable animation pattern determination table is set (S4504) to determine the execution pattern of the variable animation (also called the "variable animation pattern") that will be performed using the animation symbols, etc., based on the result of the special symbol win/loss determination. Specifically, the variable animation pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current animation mode) referenced in S4503 and the variable pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80.

For example, if the received variation pattern specification command specifies variation pattern information as "P1 (Variation Pattern P1)" (see Figure 9A), the variation performance pattern determination table corresponding to the current performance mode is set as the variation performance pattern determination table. In this embodiment, since multiple variation performance pattern determination tables corresponding to performance modes (mode status) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, in S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current performance mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set from among these variation performance pattern determination tables.

The variable animation pattern determination table is primarily used to determine the execution method of the animation symbols in the game (such as the animation symbol variation method). Multiple variable animation pattern determination tables corresponding to different animation modes (mode statuses) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current animation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable animation pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation animation obtained in S4501 and the variation animation pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation animation pattern that matches the specified variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) is determined (selected) and set (S4505). Since the special symbol variation pattern defines the variation time of the special symbols, i.e., the execution time of the variation game (see Figures 9A and 9B), the execution time (execution period) of the variation animation based on the variation animation pattern set in S4505 will be in accordance with the special symbol variation pattern. Furthermore, since the special symbol variation pattern also defines the content of the variation animation (see Figures 9A and 9B), the content (execution method) of the variation animation based on the variation animation pattern set in S4505 will be in accordance with the special symbol variation pattern.

The variation pattern primarily involves setting the variation mode of the effect symbols 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (the execution mode of the effect symbol game animation). This determines the detailed execution mode of the effect symbol game animation (variation animation), such as whether or not a reach animation is performed. Variation animations that perform (or include) a reach animation are also called "reach-enabled variation animations," and variation animations that do not perform (or include) a reach animation are also called "non-reach variation animations."

A "reach" animation refers to a display pattern for the special symbol 8, for example, when the result of a special symbol win/loss judgment is a jackpot. In this case, if the three special symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all identical (matching numbers) in a specific pattern (winning symbol arrangement, specific pattern), two of the three special symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the left special symbol 8L and the right special symbol 8R) stop (temporarily stop) as symbols that constitute the winning symbol arrangement (specific pattern) (also called "reach symbols" or "reach pattern"), while the remaining symbol (for example, the middle special symbol 8C) continues to fluctuate (also called "reach state"), and the animation indicates whether or not that remaining special symbol will stop to complete the winning symbol arrangement. This reach animation effectively heightens the anticipation of players aiming for a jackpot. The reach animation performed on the display screen 7a is a type of display animation.

The variation pattern includes not only the variation of the performance symbol 8, but also the execution patterns (performance patterns) of display effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable effects that are performed in conjunction with the variation display of the performance symbol 8. Whether or not these effects are executed is also determined (S4505). Therefore, the variation performance can be said to include the display effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable effects that are performed in conjunction with the variation performance. In other words, S4505 determines various performance patterns related to the variation performance, including the variation of the performance symbol 8, based on the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (performance pattern determination means).

Furthermore, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the performance symbols obtained in S4501 and the unillustrated stop symbol determination table, the performance symbol 8 (also called the "stop performance symbol") to be stopped and displayed is determined and set. The stop performance symbol constitutes the reach symbols, winning symbol arrangement (winning pattern), losing symbol arrangement (losing pattern), etc. of performance symbol 8. There are two types of stop displays: a confirmed stop display (also simply called "confirmed stop") which definitively stops performance symbol 8, and a provisional stop display (also simply called "provisional stop") which is displayed before definitively stopping performance symbol 8.

Temporary stop means that the display of the performance symbol 8 (e.g., scrolling display) is temporarily stopped (paused), and the performance symbol 8 is temporarily displayed at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a. The temporarily stopped performance symbol can be displayed in a slightly moving state or in a stationary state. When the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the order of first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol before the end of the display of the display of the display, the stop display of each symbol also falls under temporary stop. On the other hand, definitive stop means that the display of the performance symbol 8 has ended, and the performance symbol 8 is displayed in a completely stationary state at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a (e.g., the performance symbol display area 7b). When the performance symbol 8 is definitively stopped after the display of Therefore, the temporary stop of symbol 8 can occur once or multiple times until it reaches a confirmed stop.

The stopping symbols determined (selected) in S4505 are the symbols that temporarily stop (also called "temporary stopping symbols") and the symbols that definitely stop (also called "definite stopping symbols"). For example, the stopping symbol 8 that is displayed as a result of the variation effect, i.e., the definite stopping symbol, is a scattered combination such as "787" (also called "reach miss combination" or "reach symbol arrangement") if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment is a miss, and that miss is a reach miss. If it is a miss without a reach, it is a scattered combination such as "635" or "655" (also called "completely scattered combination" or "non-reach symbol arrangement").

Furthermore, in a low probability/low base state, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (first special symbol win/loss judgment) is a jackpot, and that jackpot is a 5R jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stop symbol for the performance symbol 8 will be a sequence of numbers other than "777". If it is a 10R first jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stop symbol for the performance symbol 8 will be a sequence of "777". On the other hand, in a low probability/high base state or a high probability/high base state, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (second special symbol win/loss judgment) is a jackpot, and that jackpot is a 10R ninth jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stop symbol for the performance symbol 8 will be a sequence of numbers other than "777" (winning symbol arrangement). If it is a 10R eighth jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stop symbol for the performance symbol 8 will be a sequence of "777". Thus, the number "777" is a guaranteed 10-round jackpot, making it the most advantageous outcome for the player.

Furthermore, in a low probability, low base state, if the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (first special symbol win/loss judgment) is a jackpot, and that jackpot is one of the 10R second to fifth jackpots (special jackpot), the confirmed stopping symbols of the performance symbol 8 will be a specific scattered pattern. This specific scattered pattern signals the win (occurrence) of a special jackpot through a symbol arrangement similar to the losing symbol arrangement, and is a type of winning symbol arrangement (special display pattern). This specific scattered pattern is also called a "special symbol arrangement."

Specific scattered patterns (special symbol arrangements) can be composed of symbol arrangements that follow some kind of pattern, such as scattered patterns consisting of sequential numbers like "123" or "567," or scattered patterns consisting of three-digit non-identical red symbols (3, 7) like "373" or "773." Furthermore, they can be composed of symbol arrangements where at least one of the three special effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the middle effect symbol 8C) is a symbol that is not normally displayed.

The aforementioned stop display pattern (symbol arrangement) of the performance symbol 8 is merely an example, and the symbols displayed as stop performance symbols can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol and the confirmed stop symbol determined in S4505 may constitute the same stop display pattern or different stop display patterns. If the temporary stop symbol differs from the confirmed stop symbol, the system can be configured so that the confirmed stop symbol is ultimately displayed after further variation display (re-variation display, re-variation effect) of the performance symbols following the temporary stop. A performance that makes it appear as if the variation display (variation effect) of the performance symbols occurs multiple times by displaying the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a single variation display of the special symbols (from the start of variation to the confirmed stop), followed by a temporary stop, and then resuming variation display, is also called a "pseudo-consecutive effect," and a pseudo-consecutive effect is simply called a "pseudo-consecutive."

Furthermore, in S4505, the judgment symbol 8s (also called the "stop judgment symbol") to be displayed as a stop in the judgment symbol display area 7c is determined and set. The only type of stop display for judgment symbol 8s is a confirmed stop display (confirmed stop). As mentioned above, judgment symbol 8s displays its fluctuations in sync with the fluctuation display of the special symbol and displays its stop in sync with the stop display of the special symbol, and primarily functions as a symbol indicating the fluctuation status of the special symbol. Therefore, the stop judgment symbol set in S4505 is a symbol that stops in a confirmed manner (confirmed stop symbol). In this embodiment, the confirmed stop symbol for judgment symbol 8s is set to have the same symbol (number symbol) arrangement as the confirmed stop symbol of the performance symbol 8. Note that at least the losing symbol arrangement (losing confirmed stop symbol) of the confirmed stop symbol for judgment symbol 8s may be a common (one type) symbol arrangement regardless of the losing symbol arrangement (losing confirmed stop symbol) of the performance symbol 8.

In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with multiple variations (variation patterns) for the variation of the display symbols 8, such as normal reach and super reach. In S4505, based on the variation pattern determination table, it is determined which of these variations to perform, or whether to perform any of them at all (this is also called "normal variation"). Hereinafter, normal reach may be referred to as "NM reach," and super reach may be referred to as "SP reach."

For example, when a reach-inducing variation animation is executed, one of the reach animations is set based on the variation pattern specification command and the variation animation pattern determination table. Here, when an SP reach animation is executed, the probability (expected value) of a jackpot is set to be higher compared to when an NM reach animation is executed. In other words, the SP reach animation is a game animation with a higher probability (expected value) of a jackpot compared to the NM reach animation.

In this embodiment, when the sub-control board 90 receives a variation pattern specification command from the main control board 80, specifying a variation pattern with a variation time of 30,000 ms (30 seconds) or more (see Figures 9A and 9B), a reach animation (a variation animation with a reach) is set (executed) based on that command. Of these, if the variation time is 30,000 ms (30 seconds), the NM reach animation is set (executed) as the reach animation, and if the variation time is 45,000 ms (45 seconds) or more, the SP reach animation is set (executed) as the reach animation. A variation animation in which the NM reach animation is executed but the SP reach animation is not (i.e., the SP reach animation is not executed) is also called an "NM reach variation animation," and a variation animation in which the SP reach animation is executed (i.e., the SP reach animation is included) is also called an "SP reach variation animation." Both the NM reach variation animation and the SP reach variation animation are collectively referred to as "reach variation animation."

Here, the variation display (variation display) of the performance symbol 8 is basically performed as follows. First, when the special symbol win/loss determination is performed and the variation display of the special symbol begins, the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R also begin to vary. Then, the variation speed of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes high speed and approximately constant, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation, the variation speed of the first stop symbol (left performance symbol 8L in this embodiment) decreases (decels) and the first stop symbol stops (temporarily stops). Next, the variation speed of the second stop symbol (right performance symbol 8R in this embodiment) decreases (decels) and the second stop symbol stops (temporarily stops), and finally the variation speed of the third stop symbol (middle performance symbol 8C in this embodiment) decreases (decels) and the third stop symbol stops (temporarily stops). After this, the three symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed position and are displayed in either a losing or winning symbol arrangement. The result of the spin display is then determined and displayed, marking the end of one spin display cycle. Normal spins and reach animations are then performed based on this sequence from the start to the end of the spin display.

Specifically, for example, when the special symbol variation time reduction function corresponding to the number of reserved balls or the game state is not activated (when the variation time reduction function is not activated), if the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change display, the left performance symbol 8L (first stop symbol) stops (temporarily stops) at a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) after the start of the variation, followed by the right performance symbol 8R (second stop symbol) stopping (temporarily stops). At this time, if the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stop) with the same number (reach pattern), a reach is established, and then a reach performance (NM reach performance or SP reach performance) is executed (for example, variation patterns P1 to P7). In the case of an SP reach performance (for example, variation patterns P1 to P6), the SP reach performance is executed after the NM reach performance (development from NM reach performance to SP reach performance). If a reach animation is performed, the three animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be displayed either in a losing or winning symbol arrangement after the animation.

On the other hand, if a reach is not established when the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stop) (for example, variation pattern P8), then that variation is a normal variation, and following the stop (temporarily stop) of the right performance symbol 8R (second stop symbol), the middle performance symbol 8C (third stop symbol) stops (temporarily stop). In this embodiment, in a normal variation, the time taken from the start of the variation of performance symbol 8 to the stop (temporarily stop) of the third stop symbol (middle performance symbol 8C in this embodiment) is approximately 11 seconds. However, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, in normal variations (for example, variation patterns P9, P10, and P18), the time from the start of the variation until the left display symbol 8L (first stop symbol) stops (temporarily stops) is shorter than normal (when the variation time reduction function is not activated). Consequently, the time until the right display symbol 8R (second stop symbol) and the middle display symbol 8C (third stop symbol) stop (temporarily stops) is also shortened.

Furthermore, depending on the variation animation pattern set in S4505 and the予告 animation pattern set in S4506 (described later), the order and timing of the stopping display of the animation symbols may differ from the above-described manner. For example, after the start of the variation display of animation symbol 8, the three animation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may stop simultaneously (temporarily stop), or all symbols may continue to vary even after exceeding a predetermined time (e.g., 9 seconds) until the first stopped symbol stops.

In this embodiment, the variable animation patterns that can be set in S4505 correspond to the special symbol variation patterns. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern to be executed is variation pattern P1, a variation animation pattern for a jackpot, including SP reach animation A, is set (see Figure 9A).

In this embodiment, multiple reach animations (reach animation patterns) are provided, and one of the reach animation patterns is set according to the variation time (variation pattern of 30,000 ms or more) during which the reach animation can be executed (S4505). As reach animations that can be executed in a non-time-saving state, there are normal reach, SP reach A, and SP reach B. Of these, normal reach corresponds to the case where the result of the win/fail judgment is a miss (variation pattern P7), and SP reach A and B have versions that correspond to the case where the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot (variation patterns P1, P2, P3) and the case where it is a miss (variation patterns P4, P5, P6) (see Figure 9A). On the other hand, as reach animations that can be executed in a time-saving state, there are normal reach, SP reach C, and SP reach D. Each of these has versions that correspond to the case where the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot (variation patterns P11, 12, 13) and the case where it is a miss (variation patterns P14, 15, 16) (see Figure 9B). The reason for including a normal jackpot reach (normal reach jackpot) during the shortened time mode is to allow for efficient processing of both losing and winning spins.

SP Reach A through D each have multiple different performance patterns (execution methods of the SP Reach performance) with varying content. For example, SP Reach A has three variations: SP Reach 1, where the character appearing in the SP Reach performance is Character A1 (First Character) and the story (plot) of the SP Reach performance is Story A1 (First Story); SP Reach 2, where the character appearing in the SP Reach performance is Character A2 (Second Character) and the story (plot) of the SP Reach performance is Story A2 (Second Story); and SP Reach 3, where the character appearing in the SP Reach performance is Character A3 (Third Character) and the story (plot) of the SP Reach performance is Story A3 (Third Story).

Therefore, when a command specifying variation pattern P1 is received from the main control board 80 as a variation pattern specification command, S4505 selects and sets one of the first SP reach A, second SP reach A, and third SP reach A as SP reach A based on the variation performance pattern determination table (not shown). In other words, the variation performance (reach variation performance) accompanying the variation display of special symbols based on variation pattern P1 can be executed in a manner that results in a jackpot via the first SP reach A, in a manner that results in a jackpot via the second SP reach A, or in a manner that results in a jackpot via the third SP reach A. Also, when a command specifying variation pattern P4 is received from the main control board 80 as a variation pattern specification command, S4505 selects and sets one of the first SP reach A, second SP reach A, and third SP reach A as SP reach A based on the variation performance pattern determination table (not shown). In other words, the variation animation (reach variation animation) accompanying the variation display of special symbols based on variation pattern P4 can be executed in three ways: one way resulting in a loss after the 1st SP Reach A, one way resulting in a loss after the 2nd SP Reach A, and one way resulting in a loss after the 3rd SP Reach A. These are also true for other SP reaches and variation patterns.

In this embodiment, with respect to special symbol variation patterns (predetermined variation patterns) with a variation time of 45,000 ms or more, multiple SP reach performance patterns (execution modes) that can be executed for a single special symbol variation pattern are provided. This allows for diversification of variation performances, including SP reach performances (SP reach variation performances), and enhances the performance effect of the variation performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding SP Reach B, there are two cases: one where SP Reach B is executed after a pseudo-consecutive sequence (variation patterns P2, P5), and another where SP Reach B is executed without a pseudo-consecutive sequence (variation patterns P3, P6) (see Figure 9A). In other words, there are two performance patterns for SP Reach B: one that goes through a pseudo-consecutive sequence (also called "pseudo-consecutive SP Reach B") and one that does not (also called "non-pseudo-consecutive SP Reach B"). This prevents the performance development from becoming uniform, thereby enhancing the performance effect. Note that the combination of pseudo-consecutive sequence and reach sequence can also be applied to performance patterns other than SP Reach B.

Furthermore, the selection rate of the SP Reach A performance patterns determined by the variation performance pattern determination table can be configured such that, for example, for variation pattern P1 (jackpot variation), the selection rate increases in the order of 3rd SP Reach A, 2nd SP Reach A, and 1st SP Reach A; and for variation pattern P4 (miss variation), the selection rate increases in the order of 1st SP Reach A, 2nd SP Reach A, and 3rd SP Reach A. This configuration ensures that the expected value is highest when 1st SP Reach A is executed, followed by 2nd SP Reach A and 3rd SP Reach A in descending order of expected value. This configuration regarding the types and selection rates of SP Reaches applies similarly to SP Reaches B through D. The types of SP Reaches (SP Reach varieties) and the number of performances are not limited to those shown in this embodiment and can be appropriately changed according to the gameplay and specifications of the pachinko machine 1.

In this embodiment, with respect to SP Reach A to D, as shown in Figures 56(1) to (5), while the SP Reach animation (SP Reach variation animation) is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a branching point (also called the "win/lose branching timing") is provided at the end of the animation, leading to a notification of a win or a loss. After the win/lose branching timing, an animation (also called the "win/lose notification animation") that notifies of a win or a loss is executed. After the execution of the win/lose notification animation, the animation symbols 8 are stopped and displayed in a specific pattern (e.g., matching symbols) or a non-specific pattern (e.g., scattered symbols), and the variation animation ends.

At the point of determining whether a win or loss occurs, if the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b is operated, and the first performance button detection switch 63c or the second performance button detection switch 63d detects this, a win/loss notification performance is executed as the performance corresponding to that operation (operation-corresponding performance). The win/loss notification performance includes a performance that announces a win (also called a "winning notification performance") and a performance that announces a loss (also called a "losing notification performance").

A variation animation (SP Reach Variation Animation) in which any of SP Reach A to D is executed is also a variation animation (also called an "Operation Variation Animation") that involves the operation of the first animation button 63a or the second animation button 63b.

At the point of the win/loss decision, there are two possible outcomes: one where an animation instructs the player to operate the first animation button 63a (also called the "first predetermined operation") (referred to as the "first operation instruction animation") (see Figure 56(2)); and another where an animation instructs the player to operate the second animation button 63b (also called the "second predetermined operation") (referred to as the "second operation instruction animation") (referred to as the "second operation instruction animation").

In this embodiment, the first operation instruction effect is performed by displaying an effect image (also called the "first operation instruction image") on the display screen 7a, which includes an image resembling the first effect button 63a (also called the "first button image") and an image indicating the operation acceptance period (also called the "gauge image"). Furthermore, the second operation instruction effect is performed by displaying an effect image (also called the "second operation instruction image") on the display screen 7a, which includes an image resembling the second effect button 63b (also called the "second button image") and an image indicating the operation acceptance period (gauge image). The term "button image" refers to either the first button image or the second button image, or both of the first operation instruction image or the second operation instruction image, or both of the first operation instruction effect or the second operation instruction effect, or both of the first operation instruction effect.

When the first or second operation instruction animation is executed, and the corresponding animation button detection switch (first animation button detection switch 63c or second animation button detection switch 63d) detects that the animation button corresponding to the operation instruction animation (first animation button 63a or second animation button 63b) has been operated within a predetermined operation acceptance period, the winning notification animation or losing notification animation is executed. In this embodiment, as the winning notification animation, an animation image showing the character appearing in the SP Reach animation succeeding in a predetermined mission (game, battle, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see Figure 56(4)), and as the losing notification animation, an animation image showing the character appearing in the SP Reach animation failing in a predetermined mission (game, battle, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see Figure 56(5)).

Furthermore, if the first or second operation instruction animation is executed, and the corresponding animation button (first animation button 63a or second animation button 63b) is not operated within the predetermined operation acceptance period, the win/loss notification animation (winning notification animation or losing notification animation) will also be executed. In other words, if the first or second operation instruction animation is executed, and the corresponding animation button is not operated within the operation acceptance period, the win/loss notification animation will be automatically executed. This ensures that even if a malfunction occurs in the animation button or the animation button detection switch, the win/loss notification animation will still be executed, preventing any loss of the animation's effect.

The type of action button that the player is instructed to operate at the win/loss branching point, that is, the type of action instruction animation to be executed at the win/loss branching point, is determined in S4505 when the SP Reach Variation animation is set, and is set together with the animation pattern of the SP Reach Variation animation. Specifically, the animation control microcomputer 91 determines the type of action instruction animation to be executed at the win/loss branching point based, for example, on the action instruction animation determination table shown in Figure 48, and sets it (S4505). Note that the table shown in the figure is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 48, the operation instruction and performance determination table in this embodiment is configured by assigning random values for operation instruction and performance determination to the "first operation instruction and performance" and "second operation instruction and performance" for each case in which the SP reach variation performance set in S4505, i.e., the SP reach variation performance to be started, relates to a probability variation jackpot (probability variation), relates to a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation), and relates to a miss (miss variation). The random values for operation instruction and performance determination are a type of performance determination random number obtained in S4501, and take values in the range of "0 to 99," for example.

Furthermore, the parenthetical notations (e.g., (30/100)) below the assigned random values in the table shown in Figure 48 indicate the selection rate (selection ratio, decision ratio) within the table. This also applies to the various tables explained below with reference to the diagrams.

For example, if the random value used to determine the operation instruction sequence obtained by S4501 is "50", then if the current SP reach variation sequence is a probability-increasing jackpot variation, the second operation instruction sequence will be determined; otherwise, the first operation instruction sequence will be determined.

The result of the operation instruction animation determination, that is, the type of operation instruction animation to be executed at the win/loss branching timing (first operation instruction animation or second operation instruction animation), is included in the variation animation pattern and is included in the variation animation start command described later and transmitted to the image control board 100.

Then, the microcontroller 91 for controlling the performance turns on the first operation instruction performance flag (not shown) if it decides to execute the first operation instruction performance at the timing of the win/loss branch, and turns on the second operation instruction performance flag (not shown) if it decides to execute the second operation instruction performance.

The first operation instruction performance flag, when ON, indicates that the first operation instruction performance will be executed at the win/loss branching timing, and when OFF, indicates that the first operation instruction performance will not be executed at the win/loss branching timing. After being turned ON, the first operation instruction performance flag turns OFF either when the first operation instruction performance is executed and the first performance button 63a is operated within the predetermined operation acceptance period (the first performance button detection switch 63c detects the operation of the first performance button 63a), or when the operation acceptance period elapses without the button being operated.

The second operation instruction performance flag, when ON, indicates that the second operation instruction performance will be executed at the win/loss branching timing, and when OFF, indicates that the second operation instruction performance will not be executed at the win/loss branching timing. The second operation instruction performance flag turns OFF after it has been turned ON, either when the second operation instruction performance is executed and the second performance button 63b is operated within the predetermined operation acceptance period (the second performance button detection switch 63d detects the operation of the second performance button 63b), or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the button being operated.

In this embodiment, when the first operation instruction performance flag is ON, that is, when the first operation instruction performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing of the SP reach variation performance (see Figure 56(2)), the performance control microcontroller 91 is prevented from making decisions regarding the execution of the second operation instruction performance or performances using the second performance button 63b (also referred to as "second operation performance") during the execution period of the variation performance (variation period), at least from the start of the SP reach performance until the end of the win/loss notification performance, thereby preventing the execution of the second operation instruction performance. In other words, during the execution period of the SP reach variation performance in which the first operation instruction performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing, the execution of the second operation instruction performance is restricted during a predetermined period before the execution of the first operation instruction performance (pre-execution predetermined period), during the execution period of the first operation instruction performance, and during a predetermined period after the execution of the first operation instruction performance (post-execution predetermined period).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the second operation instruction performance flag is ON, that is, when the second operation instruction performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing of the SP reach variation performance (see Figure 56(3)), the performance control microcontroller 91 is prevented from making decisions regarding the execution of the first operation instruction performance or performances using the first performance button 63a (also referred to as "first operation performance") during the execution period of the variation performance (variation period), at least from the start of the SP reach performance until the end of the win/loss notification performance, thereby preventing the execution of the first operation instruction performance. In other words, during the execution period of the SP reach variation performance in which the second operation instruction performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing, the execution of the first operation instruction performance is restricted during a predetermined period before the execution of the second operation instruction performance (pre-execution predetermined period), during the execution period of the second operation instruction performance, and during a predetermined period after the execution of the second operation instruction performance (post-execution predetermined period).

In this way, by restricting the execution of the second operation instruction animation when the first operation instruction animation flag is ON, and restricting the execution of the first operation instruction animation when the second operation instruction animation flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the first operation instruction animation (i.e., the timing of operating the first animation button 63a) and the execution timing of the second operation instruction animation (i.e., the timing of operating the second animation button 63a) from being too close together in a single variation animation. This avoids the complexity of having to operate both the first animation button 63a and the second animation button 63b in a short period of time. As a result, the effects of operating the first animation button 63a (first predetermined operation) and the second animation button 63b (second predetermined operation) are less likely to be diminished, making it easier for the player to feel the effects of each operation.

Furthermore, according to the operation instruction and performance determination table of this embodiment, the proportion of times the operation instruction and performance to be executed at the win/loss branching timing is determined to be the first operation instruction and performance (the proportion of times the first operation instruction and performance is executed) is highest when the SP reach variation performance is a losing variation, followed by non-probability variation and then probability variation, in decreasing order. On the other hand, the proportion of times the operation instruction and performance to be executed at the win/loss branching timing is determined to be the second operation instruction and performance (the proportion of times the second operation instruction and performance is executed) is highest when the SP reach variation performance is a probability variation, followed by non-probability variation and then a losing variation, in decreasing order. Therefore, for the player, if the second operation instruction and performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing, the expectation of a probability variation jackpot increases, and if the first operation instruction and performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing, the expectation of a probability variation jackpot decreases. Furthermore, if the first operation instruction animation is executed at the point where the outcome of the game is determined, while there is a chance of a non-probability-increasing jackpot, the probability of losing becomes more apparent.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, which determines the operation instruction performance at the timing of the win/loss branch, is configured such that the probability of transitioning to a high-probability state (second game state) after a big win is higher when the second operation instruction performance is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch of the SP reach variation performance, and the win notification performance is executed based on the operation of the second performance button 63b, and the performance symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, compared to when the first operation instruction performance is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch of the SP reach variation performance, and the win notification performance is executed based on the operation of the first performance button 63a, and the performance symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. In other words, the proportion of being controlled to a high-probability state (second game state) is different when the first operation instruction performance is executed in the SP reach variation performance and the performance symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, compared to when the second operation instruction performance is executed in the SP reach variation performance and the performance symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. In other words, the operation instruction animations function as animations that suggest the possibility of transitioning to a high-probability state (also called "probability of entering a bonus round"). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the operation instruction animations performed at the point where the outcome of the game is determined, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be possible to ensure that the probability of transitioning to a high-probability state (second game state) after a jackpot is higher when the first operation instruction animation is executed at the timing of the SP reach variation animation's win/loss branching, and then the animation symbol 8 (special symbol) stops and displays in a specific manner, compared to when the second operation instruction animation is executed at the timing of the SP reach variation animation's win/loss branching, and then the animation symbol 8 (special symbol) stops and displays in a specific manner.

In this embodiment, at the timing of the win/loss decision, there are cases where a first operation instruction animation is executed, instructing the user to operate the first performance button 63a, and cases where a second operation instruction animation is executed, instructing the user to operate the second performance button 63b. However, the content of the instructed operation is not limited to these cases. For example, if there are multiple types of operations (operation methods) for a single performance button, the animation may instruct the user to perform one of these operations. For example, if there are two operations for the first performance button 63a, namely a push operation (single press operation) where the first performance button 63a is pressed once within the operation acceptance period, and a long press operation where the first performance button 63a is held down from the start to the end of the operation acceptance period, the animation instructing the user to perform the push operation (first predetermined operation) may be executed as the first operation instruction animation, and the animation instructing the user to perform the long press operation (second predetermined operation) may be executed as the second operation instruction animation.

In this embodiment, the execution of the second operation instruction animation is restricted during the execution period of the SP reach variation animation, which is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch, specifically from the start of the SP reach animation until the end of the win/loss notification animation. This is done during a predetermined period before the first operation instruction animation is executed, during the execution period of the first operation instruction animation, and during a predetermined period after the execution of the first operation instruction animation. However, the period during which the execution of the second operation instruction animation is restricted is not limited to this. For example, the execution of the second operation instruction animation may be restricted during a predetermined period before the execution of the first operation instruction animation and during the execution period of the first operation instruction animation, or during a predetermined period after the execution of the first operation instruction animation. In other words, the execution of the second operation instruction animation only needs to be restricted during at least one of the predetermined period before the execution of the first operation instruction animation and the predetermined period after the execution of the first operation instruction animation, as well as during the execution period of the first operation instruction animation. This also makes it less likely that the effect of operating the first performance button 63a (first predetermined operation) will be diminished, and makes it easier for the player to feel the effect of the first predetermined operation. This also applies to the restriction on the execution of the first operation instruction performance when the second operation instruction performance is executed at the win/loss branching timing.

Here, the microcontroller 91 for controlling the performance, which executes the processing related to the determination and execution of operation instruction performances (first operation instruction performance, second operation instruction performance), functions as the "first operation instruction performance execution means" and the "second operation instruction performance execution means." Either the first operation instruction performance execution means or the second operation instruction performance execution means, or both, are also referred to as the "operation instruction performance execution means."

Returning to Figure 42, in S4506, processing related to setting the pre-announcement effect (pre-announcement effect setting processing) is performed (S4506). A pre-announcement effect is an effect that provides hints about the currently running variation display or the currently stored hold (variation display to be executed later). For example, it may hint at the possibility that the display result of the currently running variation display will be a specific display result (the expectation of being controlled to a special game state), the possibility that the display result of a later variation display will be a specific display result (the expectation of being controlled to a special game state), or the content of the effect (variation effect pattern) regarding the currently running variation effect or the variation effect to be executed later. Pre-announcement effects are also called "hinting effects."

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, various types of pre-announcement effects can be executed, such as pre-announcement effects based on the performance hold information (pre-determination result) stored in S4395 (also called "hold pre-read pre-announcement") and pre-announcement effects related to the current (current) variation display (also called "the variation") (also called "the variation pre-announcement"). Multiple pre-announcement effect patterns are provided to accommodate this. Pre-announcement effects are performed, for example, by displaying an image that suggests the level of expectation (also called "pre-announcement image," "pre-announcement information," "suggestion image," or "suggestion information") on the display screen 7a (also called "pre-announcement display" or "suggestion display"). In addition to display effects (pre-announcement displays), pre-announcement effects can also be performed using sound effects, light effects, and movable effects, and combinations of these effects are also possible. In other words, pre-announcement effect patterns (suggestion effect patterns) include execution methods such as display effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable effects. When executing a pre-announcement effect, for each special symbol hold or reel spin display, one pre-announcement effect (one type of effect) may be executed, or two or more pre-announcement effects (multiple types of effects) may be executed. When executing two or more pre-announcement effects, for example, they may be executed simultaneously during a reel spin display, or one effect may be executed at multiple timings (execution periods) during the reel spin display.

In S4506, the system determines whether or not to execute each pre-announcement effect (execution status) and sets the effect pattern for the pre-announcement effect to be executed. Specifically, based on the random number for determining the pre-announcement effect obtained in S4501 and the pre-announcement effect determination table stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, the system determines whether or not to execute the pre-announcement effect and the pre-announcement effect pattern. Based on this determination, the system sets the pre-announcement effect pattern.

Multiple preview performance determination tables are provided. The table used (referenced) in S4506 is determined based on the stored performance hold information (pre-judgment results) stored in S4395, the results of the special symbol win/failure judgment (win/failure judgment results related to the current special symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation)) identified by the analysis results of the fluctuation start command in S4502, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern information (fluctuation pattern and stop symbols related to the current special symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation)) also identified by the analysis results of the fluctuation start command. In other words, in S4506, the preview performance pattern (performance mode) is determined by random number generation based on the pre-judgment results (hold pre-read results), the win/failure judgment results related to the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern, etc. (performance mode determination means).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes, as a variation announcement (suggestive announcement), a prediction effect that can be executed during the variation period from the start to the end of the variation display (variation game) of identification information (special symbols and/or performance symbols), that is, a timer effect that displays the elapsed of a predetermined period, a prediction effect that can be executed when the variation display of identification information starts (first predetermined time) (also called a "variation start announcement"), a prediction effect that can be executed when a reach is established during the variation display (variation period) (second predetermined time) (also called a "reach establishment announcement"), and a prediction effect that can be executed when an NM reach effect develops into an SP reach effect during the variation display (variation period) (second predetermined time) (also called an "SP development announcement"). The timer effect is also called the "period effect," the pre-reaction at the start of a spin is called the "first suggestive effect," the pre-reaction when a reach is established is called the "second suggestive effect," and the pre-reaction when an SP (Special) develops is called the "second suggestive effect" or "third suggestive effect." The timer effect, pre-reaction at the start of a spin, pre-reach establishment, and pre-reaction when an SP develops will be explained later.

The notification effect setting process (S4506) is a process that performs execution on notification effects (reserve pre-read notification, reserve notification) that can be executed at a predetermined time, including during the display of the variation of the effect symbol 8 (variation effect), triggered by the start of the variation display (variation effect). The notification effects processed here do not include the reserve icon notification (a type of reserve pre-read notification) that occurs when a starting ball enters the target area. In other words, the processing related to setting the reserve icon notification that occurs when a starting ball enters the target area is performed not in the notification effect setting process (S4506), but in the reserve icon notification processing (S4400) described later.

Here, a pre-announcement effect (pre-announcement of pending effects) executed based on pending effects information (pre-reading information) is also called a "pre-reading effect," a pre-announcement effect executed based on the pending effects information for Special Feature 1 (first pre-reading information) is also called a "first pre-reading effect," and a pre-announcement effect executed based on the pending effects information for Special Feature 2 (second pre-reading information) is also called a "second pre-reading effect."

In the pre-announcement effect setting process (S4506), the determination of whether or not to execute the hold pre-announcement (pre-announcement effect) and the setting of the pre-announcement effect pattern are performed when the aforementioned pre-announcement effect restriction flag is OFF, and not performed when the pre-announcement effect restriction flag is ON. In other words, as mentioned above, if there is an abnormality in the memory of the effect hold information, the execution of the hold pre-announcement is restricted (prohibited). On the other hand, for the variation announcement, the determination of whether or not to execute and the setting of the pre-announcement effect pattern are performed regardless of the setting of the pre-announcement effect restriction flag. Therefore, while the execution of the hold pre-announcement may be restricted (prohibited), the execution of the variation announcement is not restricted (prohibited). As a result, even if the execution of the hold pre-announcement is restricted, the variation announcement can still be executed, thus suppressing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Next, the process in S4507 is performed, completing the variable animation start process (S4402). In S4507, a variable animation start command is set in the sub-output buffer to initiate the variable animation based on the variable animation pattern set in S4505 and the予告演出 (preview animation) pattern set in S4506 (S4507).

When the variable animation start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM of the image control board 100 the variable animation pattern identified based on the variable animation start command, i.e., predetermined variable animation image data corresponding to the variable animation pattern set in S4505 (image data indicating the start, in progress, and stop of the animation symbol 8), and the予告 animation pattern identified based on the variable animation start command, i.e., predetermined予告 animation image data corresponding to the予告 animation pattern set in S4506. The microcomputer then executes the variable animation and予告 animation based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It also executes the display of the changes in the judgment symbol 8s displayed in the judgment symbol display area 7c. Furthermore, based on the variation effect pattern and予告 effect pattern identified based on the variation effect start command, various effects such as sound effects, light effects, and movable effects (gimmick effects) are executed by corresponding effect devices (speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable effect member 14, etc.).

[Hold icon notification processing]
Next, we will explain the hold icon notification process (S4400) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91 based on the reception of the start ball entry command from the main control board 80 (YES in S4390).

As shown in Figure 43, the pending icon notification process (S4400) first determines whether the notification performance restriction flag is OFF or OFF (S4600). As mentioned above, the notification performance restriction flag is a flag that is turned ON in S4399 if there is an abnormality in the storage (storage content) of the performance pending information by S4395. When the notification performance restriction flag is ON, the execution of performances based on the performance pending information (pre-determination result information identified by the start ball entry command) is restricted. Since the pending icon notification is a type of performance (pre-read performance) based on the performance pending information (pre-determination result information), the setting status of the notification performance restriction flag is determined (confirmed).

If S4600 determines that the notification effect restriction flag is not OFF (NO in S4600), i.e., if the notification effect restriction flag is ON, this process ends without performing the processes from S4601 onwards. As a result, while the notification effect restriction flag is ON, no new hold icon notifications will be executed (started) (the execution of new hold icon notifications is restricted). Conversely, if S4600 determines that the notification effect restriction flag is OFF (YES in S4600), it is determined whether the hold icon notification flag is OFF or not (S4601).

The pending icon notification flag indicates whether or not a pending icon notification is currently being executed. It is turned ON in S4606 (described later) when a pending icon notification is being executed, and is turned OFF based on the end of the variation display (variable game) corresponding to the special symbol pending (also called the "notification target pending") that triggered the pending icon notification. Therefore, if a performance pending displayed in notification mode in the performance pending display area (first performance pending display area 9c or second performance pending display area 9d) moves to the variation pending display area 9e, even if a new performance pending is displayed (added) in the performance pending display area (first performance pending display area 9c, second performance pending display area 9d), the new performance pending will not be displayed in notification mode until the variation display (variable game) corresponding to that performance pending (notification target pending) ends. This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation for a big win in the currently running variable game (variable game corresponding to the notification target pending).

Furthermore, the hold icon notification may be turned OFF upon the start of the variation display (variation game) corresponding to the special symbol hold that triggered the hold icon notification (consumption of the special symbol hold). In this case, since the performance hold is displayed in the notification display mode in the variation hold display area 9e, and newly displayed (additional display) performance hold can be displayed in the notification display mode in the performance hold display area (first performance hold display area 9c, second performance hold display area 9d), it becomes possible to create a sense of anticipation for the player not only for the currently running variation game but also for the subsequent variation game corresponding to the special symbol hold (notification target hold).

If the hold icon notification flag is determined to be ON (NO in S4601) in S4601, the process ends without performing any further processing from S4602 onwards, because the hold icon notification is currently being executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, while a hold icon notification is being executed, a hold icon notification targeting a newly stored (additionally stored) special symbol hold (later special symbol hold) will not be executed. In other words, the execution of a new hold icon notification is restricted while a hold icon notification is being executed. Therefore, two or more performance hold notifications of the same notification display type will not be displayed in the performance hold display area. This prevents duplication of hold icon notifications, attracting the player's interest to the variable game corresponding to the currently executed hold icon notification (target hold), and creating anticipation for that variable game.

In this embodiment, if the pre-announcement effect restriction flag is ON or the hold icon pre-announcement flag is ON, the hold icon pre-announcement will not be executed (added). However, other conditions (hold icon pre-announcement restriction conditions) may also be defined to prevent the hold icon pre-announcement from being executed. For example, if the number of hold balls in Special Feature 1 at the time of the first start ball entry (the number of hold balls after adding 1 due to the start ball entry) is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than "2"), the execution of the hold icon pre-announcement may be restricted (prohibited) from the viewpoint of the execution period and effect of the hold icon pre-announcement.

Furthermore, instead of setting a hold icon notification flag, it may be possible to enable the execution of a hold icon notification targeting a later special symbol hold while a hold icon notification is being executed. In other words, the display area for the performance hold may be configured to display two or more performance hold notifications with different notification display modes.

If S4601 determines that the pending icon notification flag is OFF (YES in S4601), the pending icon notification determination table is set (S4602), and a determination is made using a random number for pending icon notification determination (S4603).

The pending icon notification determination table is a table referenced when determining whether or not to perform a pending icon notification and, if so, the notification pattern (pending icon notification pattern). For example, it is configured as shown in Figure 49. The random number for determining the pending icon notification is a type of random number for determining the performance, and takes values in the range of "0 to 199".
This is just one example.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing a reserve icon notification (also called "first reserve icon notification") by the first performance reserve 9a when the game state is a low probability, low base state, that is, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation game) is mainly executed in a low base state. Furthermore, when the game state is a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state, that is, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation game) is mainly executed in a high base state, it is possible to execute a reserve icon notification (also called "second reserve icon notification") by the second performance reserve 9b. Correspondingly, S4602 sets a reserve icon notification determination table for making a decision (judgment) regarding the first reserve icon notification when the current game state is a low base state, and sets a reserve icon notification determination table for making a decision (judgment) regarding the second reserve icon notification when the state is a high base state.

The pending icon notification determination table shown in Figure 49 is an example of a table used for determining the first pending icon notification in a low-base state (for the first pending icon notification). As shown in the figure, the pending icon notification determination table in this embodiment distinguishes the pre-determination results that can be identified based on the performance pending information (performance pending information corresponding to the newly acquired special symbol pending) stored in S4395 above into "Big Win," "SP Reach Failure," "Normal Reach Failure," and "No Reach Failure." For each pre-determination result, a random value for determining the pending icon notification is assigned to "Not Executed" and to the respective "Notification Patterns A to E" of pending icon notifications that are executable in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state).

Note that the table shown in Figure 49 is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment. Furthermore, "Not Executed" in the table means that the hold icon notification will not be executed (hold icon notification not executed pattern), and "-" in the table means that no random value for determining the hold icon notification has been assigned; in other words, the notification pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (not a selection target).

The random number used to determine the hold icon notification can be obtained, for example, at the time the start ball entry command is received (S4390) or at the time the determination related to the hold icon notification is made (S4603). The determination of the obtained hold icon notification determination random number (S4603) is then performed using the hold icon notification determination table set in S4602.

For example, in a low probability, low base state, if the random value used to determine the reserve icon notification, obtained based on the first ball entry, is "175," the reserve icon notification determination table shown in Figure 49 is referenced. If the pre-determination result of the newly stored special symbol reserve (in this case, the first special symbol reserve) is a jackpot, then "Notification Pattern E" is determined; if the pre-determination result is a failed SP reach, then "Notification Pattern C" is determined; if the pre-determination result is a failed normal reach, then "Notification Pattern A" is determined; and if the pre-determination result is a failed reach, then "Not Executed" is determined.

Regarding the pre-determination results in the low base state (non-shortened time state), a jackpot occurs when the pre-determination result related to the special symbol win/loss determination is a jackpot and the special symbol variation pattern is one of P1, P2, or P3 (variation pattern with a variation time of 45,000 ms or more). An SP reach miss occurs when the pre-determination result related to the special symbol win/loss determination is a miss and the special symbol variation pattern is one of P4, P5, or P6 (variation pattern with a variation time of 45,000 ms or more). A normal reach miss occurs when the pre-determination result related to the special symbol win/loss determination is a miss and the special symbol variation pattern is P7 (variation pattern with a variation time of 30,000 ms). A no-reach miss occurs when the pre-determination result related to the special symbol win/loss determination is a miss and the special symbol variation pattern is one of P8, P9, or P10 (variation pattern with a variation time of 12,000 ms or less) (see Figure 9A). Furthermore, the pre-determination results for the high base state (shortened time state) (jackpot, SP reach failure, normal reach failure, no reach failure) can be considered in the same way as for the low base state (non-shortened time state) (see Figure 9B), so the explanation is omitted.

Here, we will explain the hold icon notification patterns and hold icon notifications that can be set based on the hold icon notification determination table shown in Figure 49. In this embodiment, multiple types of hold icons with different display modes are provided as hold icons (performance hold 9a, 9b) that can be displayed in the performance hold display areas 9c, 9d and the variable hold display area 9e. Specifically, as shown in Figure 55, there are normal hold icons, which are the display mode when the hold icon notification is not being performed (also called the "normal display mode"), and special hold icons, which are the display mode when the hold icon notification is being performed (also called the "notification display mode"). One type or more types (multiple types) of normal hold icons and special hold icons can each be provided. Normal hold icons are also called "normal hold display" or "normal memory display," and special hold icons are also called "special hold display" or "special memory display."

The normal hold icon (the normal display mode of the hold icon) can be, for example, a hold pattern (a special hold image) composed of predetermined colors and shapes, and may include characters, numbers, symbols, etc., that represent the number of holds.

A special hold icon (a type of hold icon display) can be a hold symbol (a display hold image) that differs from a normal hold icon (normal display) in terms of color, size, shape (design), etc., or by adding special displays such as characters, items, letters, or symbols to a normal hold icon (normal display). In other words, a special hold icon is designed to be more visually striking than a normal hold icon.

As shown in Figure 55, this embodiment includes a white, circular hold icon as the normal hold icon (normal display mode). It also includes blue, green, or red circular hold icons and a timer-shaped hold icon that mimics a digital timer as special hold icons (pre-announcement display modes). The timer-shaped hold icons come in relatively small and large sizes. The white, circular hold icon (normal hold icon) is also called "white hold," the blue, circular hold icon (a type of special hold icon) is also called "blue hold," and the red, circular hold icon (a type of special hold icon) is also called "red hold." Furthermore, the timer-shaped hold icon (a type of special hold icon) is also called "timer hold," with the timer hold with a relatively small display size being called "small timer hold," and the timer hold with a relatively large display size being called "large timer hold." Furthermore, the pre-announcement effects using the hold icon (performance hold) (hold icon pre-announcement, pre-reading effect) and the pre-announcement effects using the timer hold (timer hold icon pre-announcement) are also called "specific effects."

In the hold icon notification table shown in Figure 49, among the notification patterns (hold icon notification patterns), notification pattern A is a pattern where the hold icon is displayed as blue hold, notification pattern B is a pattern where the hold icon is displayed as green hold, notification pattern C is a pattern where the hold icon is displayed as red hold, notification pattern D is a pattern where the hold icon is displayed as small timer hold, and notification pattern E is a pattern where the hold icon is displayed as large timer hold.

In this embodiment, the display of special hold icons, such as changes in color or shape (a timer in this embodiment), is configured to suggest the possibility that the target hold is a jackpot hold, that is, the possibility of a jackpot occurring during the variation animation resulting from the consumption of the target hold (i.e., the expected probability of a jackpot). Specifically, based on the selection rate (selection ratio, determination ratio) of the notification pattern for each pre-determination result determined in the hold icon notification determination table shown in Figure 49, the expected probability increases in the order of blue hold (notification pattern A), green hold (notification pattern B), and red hold (notification pattern C) when the hold icon changes color, and in the order of small timer hold and large timer hold when the hold icon changes shape.

Furthermore, the timer hold indicates not only the expected outcome of the target hold, but also the possibility that the timer effect described later may be executed as a result of the consumption of the target hold. In other words, the timer hold functions as an indication regarding the execution of the timer effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the timer hold (the display mode of the timer-shaped hold symbol) is set so that the time display portion is "??:??" (also called the "standby display mode"). This is because the timer effect has not yet been executed (started) at the time the timer hold is displayed as a hold icon corresponding to the special hold (hold memory).

The aforementioned hold icon notification system can attract players' interest by highlighting the display of the hold icon and whether or not a timer effect is triggered when the hold icon notification is executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Returning to Figure 43, if the result of the S4603 determination is that the pending icon notification should not be executed (NO in S4604), this process ends without performing the processes from S4605 onwards. If the pending icon notification should be executed (YES in S4604), the pending icon notification pattern (one of notification patterns A to E) determined (selected) based on the pending icon notification table is set (S4605).

Next, in S4606, the pending icon notification flag is turned ON (S4606). In this embodiment, the pending icon notification flag is set according to the type of pending icon notification pattern (notification patterns A to E). Therefore, for example, if the pending icon notification pattern set in S4605 (determined by the judgment in S4603) is notification pattern B, the pending icon notification flag corresponding to notification pattern B is turned ON. If it is notification pattern E, the pending icon notification flag corresponding to notification pattern E is turned ON.

Next, in S4607, a value corresponding to the number of special feature balls after an increment of 1 due to the storage of the special feature balls (preview target balls) that are the target of this preview is set in the preview icon preview counter (S4607). For example, if the number of special feature balls held in special feature 1 when the special feature 1 start ball entry command is received (S4390), that is, the number of special feature balls held in special feature 1 after an increment of 1 due to the occurrence of the first start ball entry, is "3", then the value "3" is set in the preview icon preview counter. The value to be set in the preview icon preview counter can also be determined based on the special feature ball count command transmitted from the main control board 80 (see S2502).

The value of the hold icon notification counter set in S4607 will be deducted by 1 each time the display of a special symbol of the same type as the special symbol hold that triggered the setting of the counter (for example, the first special symbol if it's the first special symbol hold) begins.

Next, a pending icon notification command, which instructs the execution of the pending icon notification based on the pending icon notification pattern set in S4605, is set in the sub-output buffer (S4608), and this process ends.

When the hold icon notification command set in S4608 is transmitted to the image control board 100 via command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the hold icon notification pattern identified based on the received hold icon notification command, i.e., the hold icon notification pattern set in S4605, from the ROM of the image control board 100. The microcomputer then executes the hold icon notification using the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (performance hold display area, variable hold display area).

The above explanation of the hold icon notification process (S4400) mainly focused on the hold icon notification (first hold icon notification) based on the hold icon notification table in a low base state. However, the hold icon notification (second hold icon notification) in a high base state can be performed in a similar manner.

Furthermore, the configuration of the hold icon notification table, i.e., the execution rate of hold icon notifications and the selection rate (execution rate) of each notification pattern, may be the same or different between the low base state and the high base state. Also, the content, types, and number of hold icon notification patterns (notification display modes of hold icons) may be the same or different between the low base state and the high base state. The number of types of hold icon notification patterns may be greater or less than in this embodiment. Additionally, the display modes (normal display mode and/or notification display mode) of the first performance hold 9a (first hold icon) and the second performance hold 9b (second hold icon) may be the same or different.

Here, the microcontroller 91 for controlling the performance, which executes the pending icon notification process (S4400), functions as a "specific performance execution means."

[Notice of Change]
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing timer effects, effect at the start of a spin, effect when a reach is established, and effect when an SP develops, as these effect notifications (notification effects). These notification effects will be described below.

The timer effect, the notification at the start of the variation, the notification when a reach is established, and the notification when the special feature develops are notification effects (suggestive effects) that are possible for the variation display of identification information (variation gameplay) that occurs at least in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). In other words, they are notification effects (suggestive effects) that are possible at least in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). Therefore, the following explanation of the timer effect, the notification at the start of the variation, the notification when a reach is established, and the notification when the special feature develops assumes that the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (the first special symbol reserve is consumed) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state).

When a variation announcement is executed during a single variation display (variation period), one of the following may be executed: the variation start announcement, the reach establishment announcement, or the SP development announcement. Alternatively, two or more may be executed, or all of them may be executed. In other words, when a variation announcement is executed, at least one of the following is possible during a single variation display (variation period): the variation start announcement, the reach establishment announcement, or the SP development announcement.

As will be explained in more detail later, the timer effect displays the time remaining until a reach is established or an SP reach is developed. Therefore, when the timer effect is executed during a single spin display (spin period), the reach establishment notification or SP development notification will be executed during that same spin display (spin period). When both the timer effect and the reach establishment notification are executed during a single spin display (spin period), the timer effect also functions as an effect displaying the time remaining until the reach establishment notification is executed. In this case, the reach establishment notification will be executed after the time remaining displayed by the timer effect has elapsed. Furthermore, when both the timer effect and the SP development notification are executed during a single spin display (spin period), the timer effect also functions as an effect displaying the time remaining until the SP development notification is executed. In this case, the SP development notification will be executed after the time remaining displayed by the timer effect has elapsed.

[Timer effect]
The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a timer effect (period effect) at any of several predetermined execution times during the variation period.

The timer effect can be executed in three ways: Execution Pattern A, which starts the timer display (showing the elapsed time) when the effect symbol 8 (and special symbols) begin to change; Execution Pattern B, which starts the timer display (showing the elapsed time) when the first stop symbol stops (temporarily stops) after the effect symbol 8 begins to change; and Execution Pattern C, which starts the timer display (showing the elapsed time) when a reach is achieved after the effect symbol 8 begins to change (see Figure 50 (4)).

Execution pattern A starts the timer effect (timer display) at the beginning of the fluctuation period, displaying the remaining time until a reach is achieved (10 seconds in this embodiment) in a countdown format (see Figure 57(2)). In other words, the execution period of the timer effect under execution pattern A is approximately 10 seconds, from the start of the fluctuation period until a reach is achieved.

Execution pattern B starts the timer effect (timer display) when the first stop symbol stops during the variation period, and displays the remaining time until the SP reach develops (21 seconds in this embodiment) in a countdown format (countdown display) (see Figure 58 (2)). In other words, the execution period of the timer effect by execution pattern B is approximately 21 seconds during the variation period, from the stopping of the first stop symbol to the development of the SP reach.

Execution pattern C starts the timer effect (timer display) when a reach is achieved during the variation period, displaying the remaining time until it develops into an SP reach (20 seconds in this embodiment) in a countdown format (see Figure 59(2)). In other words, the execution period of the timer effect by execution pattern C is approximately 20 seconds during the variation period, from the achievement of a reach to the development of an SP reach.

The timer effect in execution pattern A displays the remaining time until a reach is achieved, and therefore can be executed using the variation display (reach variation effect) based on special feature variation patterns P1 to P7 (see Figure 9A).

The timer effects in execution patterns B and C both display the remaining time until the SP reach develops, and can therefore be executed using the variation display (SP reach variation effect) based on special feature variation patterns P1 to P6 (see Figure 9A). However, since the timer effect in execution pattern B starts earlier than the timer effect in execution pattern C, the remaining time until the SP reach development displayed in the timer effects will be different for each.

In this embodiment, the timer effect can be executed based on one of the execution patterns A to C described above. Specifically, the timer effect can be executed for one of the following periods: approximately 10 seconds from the start of the variation (execution pattern A), approximately 21 seconds from the stopping of the first stop symbol (execution pattern B), or approximately 20 seconds from the establishment of a reach (execution pattern C). Furthermore, the execution pattern of the timer effect, i.e., the timing of the timer effect's start, can indicate the level of expectation.

Furthermore, the timer display pattern includes three options: Display Pattern A, where the timer display color is blue; Display Pattern B, where the timer display color is green; and Display Pattern C, where the timer display color is red (see Figure 50 (5)). The display pattern (display color) can be used to suggest the level of expectation.

As mentioned above, since the timer effect is an effect that can be executed as a variation announcement (announcement effect), the microcontroller 91 for effect control performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the timer effect, and if so, the execution pattern and display pattern, in the announcement effect setting process (S4506) within the variation effect start process (S4402). Specifically, it performs the timer effect processing (S5000) shown in Figure 44.

As shown in Figure 44, the timer effect processing (S5000) first determines whether the hold icon notification flag is OFF, that is, whether the hold icon notification is currently running (S5001). The hold icon notification flag is the flag that is turned ON in S4606 (see Figure 43) as described above. If it is determined that the hold icon notification flag is OFF (the hold icon notification is not being executed) (YES in S5001), the timer effect execution determination table A shown in Figure 50(1) is set (S5002). In this embodiment, if the hold icon notification is not being executed, the timer effect is made executable. This makes it possible to suppress the decrease in game enjoyment caused by the hold icon notification not being executed.

In contrast, if the pending icon notification flag is determined to be ON (YES in S5001), that is, if the pending icon notification is currently running, it is determined whether the pending icon notification counter value is "1" (S5003). The pending icon notification counter is the counter set in S4607 (see Figure 43) mentioned above. If its count value is "1" during the determination process in S5003, it means that the current variation performance (variation display) that is about to begin corresponds to the first special symbol pending (notification target pending) that triggered the execution of the pending icon notification. In other words, it means that the time has come to consume the target pending (notification target pending) of the pending icon notification.

If the value of the pending icon notification counter is determined to be anything other than "1" (NO in S5003), it is determined whether the currently running pending icon notification is due to a timer hold (S5004). This determination in S5004 can be made, for example, by referring to the setting status of the pending icon notification flags, which are provided according to the pending icon notification patterns A to E (see Figure 49), or by referring to the display state (display control content) of the currently displayed pending icon.

If, in S5004, it is determined that the currently running hold icon notification is due to a timer hold (YES in S5004), this process is terminated without performing the processes from S5005 onwards. In this case, the timer hold icon notification is being executed (the special hold icon is displayed) for the first special feature hold corresponding to any of the special feature 1 hold ball counts "2" to "4". In this embodiment, the timer effect is not executed under such circumstances. This is because, for example, if the timer hold is displayed as a special hold icon for the first special feature hold with any of the special feature 1 hold ball counts "2" to "4", and the timer effect is executed (occurs) before that timer hold (notification target hold) is consumed, the meaning (notification effect) of the timer hold will be diminished. In other words, the timer hold function indicates that the timer effect may be executed during the variation effect resulting from the consumption of the special symbol hold (the hold targeted for the announcement) that triggered the timer hold icon announcement (the trigger for the timer hold display). Therefore, if the timer effect is executed during the variation effect resulting from the consumption of a special symbol hold prior to the timer hold, a discrepancy in the presentation will occur.

In contrast, if it is determined that the currently running hold icon notification is not due to a timer hold (NO in S5004), the timer effect execution determination table A shown in Figure 50(1) is set (S5002). In this embodiment, the timer effect can be executed not only when the hold icon notification is not being executed, but also when the hold icon notification is being executed due to a color change of the hold icon, and during fluctuation effects caused by the consumption of the hold targeted by the hold icon notification due to a color change (also called the "color change notification target hold"). This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in combination with the effect of the hold icon notification due to a color change of the hold icon.

On the other hand, if S5003 determines that the value of the hold icon notification counter is "1" (YES in S5003), that is, if the current variation performance that is about to begin corresponds to the target hold for the hold icon notification (notification target hold), in other words, if the first special symbol hold that is about to be processed is the target hold for the hold icon notification, then it is determined whether or not that hold icon notification is due to a small timer hold (S5005). If it is determined that it is not due to a small timer hold (NO in S5005), then it is determined whether or not that hold icon notification is due to a large timer hold (S5007). The determinations in S5005 and S5007 can also be made by referring to, for example, the setting status of the hold icon notification flags provided according to the hold icon notification patterns A to E (see Figure 49), or the display state (display control content) of the currently displayed hold icon, similar to the determination in S5004.

If it is determined in S5005 that the issue is due to a small timer hold (YES in S5005), the timer effect execution determination table B shown in Figure 50(2) is set (S5006). If it is determined in S5007 that the issue is due to a large timer hold (YES in S5007), the timer effect execution determination table C shown in Figure 50(3) is set (S5008).

In response to this, if it is determined in S5005 that it is not due to a small timer hold (NO in S5005), and it is determined in S5007 that it is not due to a large timer hold (NO in S5007), then the timer effect execution determination table A shown in Figure 50(1) is set (S5002).

Next, in S5009, based on the timer effect execution determination table (one of timer effect execution determination tables A to C) and the random number used for timer effect execution determination, a decision is made (S5009) to determine whether or not to execute the timer effect.

Here, the timer effect execution determination tables A to C of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 50(1) to (3). Note that the tables shown in these figures are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

Timer effect execution judgment tables A to C are all constructed by assigning random values for timer effect execution judgment to "not execute" and "execute" for special symbol variation patterns (P1 to P10, see Figure 9A) that can be selected when executing (starting) the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). However, Timer effect execution judgment table C (see Figure 50(3)) does not include P5 to P10 among the special symbol variation patterns P1 to P10. This is because the reserve icon notification due to the large timer reserve can be executed for special symbol reserves where the pre-determination result is "jackpot" or "SP reach failure," that is, special symbol reserves where the variation time is 45,000 ms or more (variation patterns P1 to P6) (see Figure 9A, Figure 49).

The random number used for determining the execution of the timer effect is a type of random number used for determining the effect, obtained in S4501 as described above, and takes a value within the range of "0 to 99".

In the tables shown in Figures 50(1) to (3), "Not Executed" means that the timer effect will not be executed, and "Executed" means that the timer effect will be executed. Furthermore, "-" in the same table means that no random value for determining whether the timer effect will be executed has been assigned.

According to the timer effect execution determination table of this embodiment, the percentage of times the timer effect is decided to "execute" (the execution rate of the timer effect) is highest for timer effect execution determination tables A and B when the special symbol variation pattern related to the current variation effect to be started, i.e., the special symbol variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (information specifying the variation pattern) included in the variation start command received in S4401, is P1 to P3 (jackpot variation), followed by P4 to P6 (SP reach failure variation), and then P7 (NM reach failure variation), in that order, and not selected (the timer effect is not executed) when it is P8 to P10 (no reach failure variation). Furthermore, for timer effect execution determination table C, the percentage of times the timer effect is decided to "execute" (the execution rate of the timer effect) is higher when the special symbol variation pattern is P1 to P3 (jackpot variation) compared to when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach failure variation).

On the other hand, the percentage of times the timer effect is decided as "not executed" (the percentage of times the timer effect is not executed) is highest for timer effect execution judgment tables A and B when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P8 to P10 (no reach, miss variation) (100% in this embodiment), followed by P7 (NM reach miss variation), P4 to P6 (SP reach miss variation), and P1 to P3 (jackpot variation), in that order, with the percentage decreasing. Furthermore, for timer effect execution judgment table C, the percentage of times the timer effect is decided as "not executed" (the percentage of times the timer effect is not executed) is higher when the special symbol variation pattern is P4 to P6 (SP reach miss variation) compared to when it is P1 to P3 (jackpot variation).

Therefore, when a timer animation is executed during a variation animation, the probability of an SP reach animation being executed (SP expectation rate) and the probability of a jackpot occurring (jackpot expectation rate) are higher compared to when the timer animation is not executed.

Furthermore, among the timer effect execution judgment tables A through C, the proportion of times the timer effect is decided to "execute" (the execution rate of the timer effect) is highest in timer effect execution judgment table C, followed by timer effect execution judgment table B, and then timer effect execution judgment table A, in decreasing order of proportion.

Therefore, in variable animations that begin when the hold icon notification has not been executed, or in variable animations that begin when a target hold for a hold icon notification other than the timer hold (notification patterns A to C) (color change in this embodiment) is consumed, the timer effect is less likely to be executed (the execution rate of the timer effect is lower) compared to variable animations that begin when a target hold for a hold icon notification by a small timer hold (notification pattern D) (also called "small timer notification target hold") is consumed, or when a target hold for a hold icon notification by a large timer hold (notification pattern E) (also called "large timer notification target hold") is consumed. In other words, in variable animations that begin when a small timer notification target hold is consumed, or when a large timer notification target hold is consumed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed (the execution rate of the timer effect is higher) compared to variable animations that begin when the hold icon notification has not been executed, or in variable animations that begin when a target hold for a hold icon notification other than the timer hold (notification patterns A to C) (color change notification target hold) is consumed.

Furthermore, in the variation sequence that begins when a large timer-triggered reserve is consumed, the timer sequence is more likely to be executed (the execution rate of the timer sequence is higher) compared to the variation sequence that begins when a small timer-triggered reserve is consumed. In other words, the execution rate of the timer sequence differs depending on how the timer reserve is displayed.

In this way, by using different tables to determine the execution of the timer effect depending on the display status of the timer hold (the execution status of the hold icon notification due to the timer hold), it becomes possible to vary the execution rate of the timer effect depending on the display pattern of the timer hold. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the display pattern of the timer hold (the execution pattern of the hold icon notification due to the timer hold) and whether or not the timer effect is executed after the timer hold is displayed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even when a reserve that is the target of the timer-based reserve icon notification (also called a "timer notification target reserve") is consumed, the timer effect execution judgment tables B and C also assign random numbers for timer effect execution judgment to "non-execution." Therefore, the timer effect may not be executed in the variation effect that is performed when the timer notification target reserve is consumed. In this case, the timer-based reserve icon notification becomes a false notification. In other words, the timer-based reserve icon notification is still possible even when the timer effect is not executed. This prevents the execution of the timer-based reserve icon notification from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, in the variation animation that begins when a timer-triggered reserve is consumed, the timer animation may be less likely to occur compared to the variation animation that begins when the reserve icon announcement is not performed, or the variation animation that begins when a color-change-triggered reserve is consumed (the execution rate of the timer animation may be lower). In this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that the timer animation may occur even if the reserve icon announcement due to the timer reserve is not performed (even if the timer reserve is not displayed). In other words, it is possible to create anticipation for the timer animation to occur even if the timer reserve is not displayed.

Returning to Figure 44, if the timer effect execution determination (S5009) results in a decision not to execute the timer effect (NO in S5010), this process ends without performing the processes from S5011 onwards. On the other hand, if the timer effect is to be executed (YES in S5010), the timer effect execution pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(4) is set (S5011).

Next, in S5012, based on the timer effect execution pattern determination table and the random number for timer effect execution pattern determination set in S5011, the timer effect execution pattern to be executed in the current variation effect is determined and set (S5012). Since there are three types of timer effect execution patterns (A to C) as mentioned above, S5012 sets one of execution patterns A to C.

As mentioned above, execution pattern A starts the timer effect at the beginning of the variation period, execution pattern B starts the timer effect when the first stop symbol stops during the variation period, and execution pattern C starts the timer effect when a reach is established during the variation period. Therefore, the process in S5012 is also the process of determining and setting the start timing (execution period) of the timer effect to be executed in this variation effect.

Here, the timer effect execution pattern determination table for this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 50(4). Note that the table shown in the figure is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 50(4), the timer effect execution pattern determination table of this embodiment is configured by assigning random values for determining the timer effect execution pattern to "Execution Pattern A," "Execution Pattern B," and "Execution Pattern C" for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7 (reach or higher) that can be selected when executing (starting) the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) in a low probability low base state (non-time-saving state). However, for special symbol variation pattern P7, the random values for determining the timer effect execution pattern are assigned only to "Execution Pattern A." As mentioned above, since both Execution Patterns B and C display the remaining time until development to an SP reach, Execution Patterns B and C are not applicable to special symbol variation pattern P7 (NM reach miss variation) where the SP reach effect is not executed.

The random number used to determine the timer effect execution pattern is a type of random number used to determine the effect, obtained in S4501 as described above, and takes values within the range of "0 to 99". Note that in the table shown in Figure 50(4), "-" indicates that no random value for determining the timer effect execution pattern has been assigned; in other words, the execution pattern corresponding to "-" is not selected (not a target for selection).

The timer effect execution pattern determination table in this embodiment excludes special feature variation patterns P8 to P10. This is because, according to the aforementioned timer effect execution judgment tables A to C, the timer effect will not be executed for special feature variation patterns P8 to P10 (see Figures 50(1) to (3)).

According to the timer effect execution pattern determination table of this embodiment, the proportion of executions determined to be execution pattern A (the proportion of timer effects executed using execution pattern A) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect (the special symbol variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command included in the variation start command received in S4401 above) is P7 (NM reach failure variation), followed by P4-P6 (SP reach failure variation), and then P1-P3 (jackpot variation), in decreasing order. Furthermore, the proportion of executions determined to be execution pattern B (the proportion of timer effects executed using execution pattern B) is the same whether the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P1-P3 (jackpot variation) or P4-P6 (SP reach failure variation). Also, the proportion of executions determined to be execution pattern C (the proportion of timer effects executed using execution pattern C) is higher when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P1-P3 (jackpot variation) than when it is P4-P6 (SP reach failure variation).

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P1-P3 (jackpot variation), the probability of execution pattern C being determined is the highest, followed by execution pattern B, and then execution pattern A in decreasing order. When it is P4-P6 (SP reach failure variation), the probability of execution pattern A being determined is the highest, followed by execution pattern B, and then execution pattern C in decreasing order. When it is P7 (NM reach failure variation), execution pattern A is always determined (100% of the time) (execution patterns B and C are never determined).

Therefore, the timer effects are configured in the following order: timer effect by execution pattern A, timer effect by execution pattern B, and timer effect by execution pattern C. That is, the timer effect that starts at the beginning of the variation period, the timer effect that starts when the first stop symbol stops, and the timer effect that starts when a reach is established, in this order, thus increasing the likelihood of a big win. In other words, the timer effect in execution pattern A is a low-expectancy type of予告演出 (pre-announcement effect), the timer effect in execution pattern B is a medium-expectancy type of予告演出 (pre-announcement effect), and the timer effect in execution pattern C is a high-expectancy type of予告演出 (pre-announcement effect).

Furthermore, focusing on a specific timing among the multiple timings at which the timer effect can be executed during the variation period (in this embodiment, at the start of variation, when the first stop symbol stops, and when a reach is established), for example, at the start of variation (execution pattern A), the execution rate of the timer effect at the start of variation differs depending on whether it is a jackpot variation (when controlled to a special game state) or a losing variation (when not controlled to a special game state). Similarly, focusing on when a reach is established (execution pattern C), the execution rate of the timer effect at the time of a reach is also different depending on whether it is a jackpot variation (when controlled to a special game state) or a losing variation (when not controlled to a special game state) (see Figure 50(4)).

This makes it possible to attract players' attention to the timing of the timer's execution (start), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Returning to Figure 44, after setting the timer effect execution pattern in S5012, the timer effect display pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(5) is then set (S5013). Based on the set timer effect display pattern determination table and the random number used for determining the timer effect display pattern, the display pattern of the timer effect to be executed in this variation effect is determined and set (S5014), thus ending this process. As mentioned above, there are three types of timer effect display patterns, A to C, so in S5014, one of display patterns A to C is set.

Here, the timer display pattern determination table for this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 50(5). Note that the table shown in the figure is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 50(5), the timer display pattern determination table of this embodiment is configured by assigning random values for determining the timer display pattern to "Display Pattern A," "Display Pattern B," and "Display Pattern C" for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7, which can be selected when performing (starting) the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). However, for special symbol variation pattern P7, random values for determining the timer display pattern are assigned to "Display Pattern A" and "Display Pattern B," but not to "Display Pattern C."

The random number used to determine the timer display pattern is a type of random number used to determine the display pattern, obtained in S4501 as described above, and takes values within the range of "0 to 99". Note that in the table shown in Figure 50(5), "-" indicates that no random number for determining the timer display pattern has been assigned; in other words, the display pattern corresponding to "-" is not selected (not a target for selection).

The timer effect display pattern determination table in this embodiment excludes special feature variation patterns P8 to P10. This is because, according to the aforementioned timer effect execution determination tables A to C, the timer effect is not executed for special feature variation patterns P8 to P10 (see Figures 50(1) to (3)).

According to the timer effect display pattern determination table of this embodiment, the proportion of times display pattern A is determined (the proportion of timer effects executed using display pattern A) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect (the special symbol variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command included in the variation start command received in S4401 above) is P7 (NM reach failure variation), followed by P4 to P6 (SP reach failure variation), and then P1 to P3 (jackpot variation), in decreasing order. Furthermore, the proportion of times display pattern B is determined (the proportion of timer effects executed using display pattern B) is the same when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P1 to P3 (jackpot variation) and when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach failure variation), and is lower in the case of P7 (NM reach failure variation) than in these cases. Furthermore, the proportion of times display pattern C is determined (the proportion of times the timer effect is executed using display pattern C) is higher when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P1 to P3 (jackpot variation) than when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach failure variation).

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation is P1-P3 (jackpot variation), the probability of determining display pattern C is the highest, followed by display pattern B, and then display pattern A in decreasing order. When it's P4-P6 (SP reach failure variation), the probability of determining display pattern A is the highest, followed by display pattern B, and then display pattern C in decreasing order. When it's P7 (NM reach failure variation), the probability of determining execution pattern A is higher than the probability of determining execution pattern B, and display pattern C is never determined.

Therefore, the timer effects are configured in the following order: timer effect with display pattern A, timer effect with display pattern B, timer effect with display pattern C; that is, timer effect with blue timer display, timer effect with green timer display, and timer effect with red timer display, in which order the expectation of a big win increases. In other words, the timer effect with display pattern A (blue timer display) is a low-expectation type of予告演出 (low-expectation予告), the timer effect with display pattern B (green timer display) is a medium-expectation type of予告演出 (medium-expectation予告), and the timer effect with display pattern C (red timer display) is a high-expectation type of予告演出 (high-expectation予告).

Furthermore, focusing on a specific display mode among the multiple display modes of the timer effect (in this embodiment, a blue timer display, a green timer display, and a red timer display), for example, the blue timer display (display pattern A), is configured such that the proportion of times the timer effect is executed using the blue timer display differs between the case of a jackpot variation (when controlled to a special game state) and the case of a losing variation (when not controlled to a special game state). Similarly, focusing on the red timer display (display pattern C), the proportion of times the timer effect is executed using the red timer display (specific display mode) differs between the case of a jackpot variation (when controlled to a special game state) and the case of a losing variation (when not controlled to a special game state) (see Figure 50(5)).

This makes it possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the timer (in this embodiment, the color of the timer display), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The execution pattern and display pattern for the timer effect are set through the processes described in S5011 to S5014, thereby setting the effect pattern for the timer effect to be executed in this variation effect. This set timer effect pattern is included in the variation effect start command set in S4507. When this variation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the timer effect image data corresponding to the timer effect pattern (execution pattern + display pattern) identified based on the received variation effect start command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes the timer effect using the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, if a timer hold icon notification is being executed, and the timer effect is executed according to execution pattern A in the variation effect due to the consumption of the timer hold (notified hold), then, as shown in Figures 57(1) and (2), the timer effect will start along with the start of the variation effect (start of variation) following the previous variation effect (stop of variation). Specifically, when the variation effect ends (stops) while the timer hold is displayed in the effect hold display area 9c (see Figure 57(1)), and the next variation effect starts (the timer hold is consumed), the timer hold that was displayed in the effect hold display area 9c before the start of the variation effect will be displayed as a variation hold icon in the variation hold display area 9e (see Figure 57(2)) along with the start of the variation effect (start of variation), and the timer effect will start.

Furthermore, when a timer hold icon notification is executed due to the timer hold (notification target hold), and the timer effect is executed according to execution pattern B in the variation effect resulting from the consumption of the timer hold (notification target hold), as shown in Figures 58(1) and (2), the timer effect starts after the start of the variation effect and upon the stopping of the first stop symbol. Specifically, after the start of the variation effect due to the consumption of the timer hold, the timer hold as a variation hold icon is displayed in a standby display mode (in this embodiment, "??:??") until the first stop symbol stops (see Figure 58(1)), and the timer effect starts upon the stopping of the first stop symbol (see Figure 58(2)).

Furthermore, when a timer hold icon notification is executed due to the consumption of the timer hold (the target hold), and the timer effect is executed according to execution pattern C during the variation effect, as shown in Figures 59(1) and (2), the timer effect starts after the start of the variation effect, upon the establishment of a reach (the stop of the reach symbols). Specifically, after the start of the variation effect due to the consumption of the timer hold, the timer hold as a variation hold icon is displayed in a standby display mode (in this embodiment, "??:??") until a reach is established (see Figure 59(1)), and the timer effect starts upon the establishment of a reach (see Figure 59(2)).

In this embodiment, since it is possible to implement a hold icon notification (notification patterns D, E) in which the display mode of the hold icon is timer hold (see Figures 49 and 55), considering the coordination with the hold icon notification by timer hold, the display mode of the variable hold icon displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is set to a timer shape (timer display mode, timer effect image) and the timer effect is executed (see Figures 57(2), 58(2), and 59(2)). Specifically, when a variable effect corresponding to a timer hold (notification target hold) is started (the timer hold is consumed), and the timer effect is started in conjunction with the start of the variable effect, the timer effect image displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is immediately displayed in a mode in which the timer display countdown is shown (also called the "operation display mode") (see Figures 57(1) and (2)). On the other hand, if the timer effect does not start when the fluctuation effect begins, the timer effect image displayed in the fluctuation hold display area 9e will be displayed in a standby display mode until the timer effect starts (see Figures 58(1) and 59(1)). Then, when the timer effect starts, the timer effect image displayed in the fluctuation hold display area 9e will be displayed in an active display mode (see Figures 57(2), 58(2), and 59(2)). This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect by creating a correlation between the hold icon notification due to timer hold and the timer effect.

Furthermore, it is also possible to execute the timer effect without using the fluctuating hold icon. For example, the timer effect image could be displayed in a position on the display screen 7a that avoids the effect symbol display area 7b and the effect hold display areas 9c-9e, and the timer effect could be executed from there. This would allow for differentiation between the hold icon notification and the timer effect, making it possible to draw the player's attention to each effect (notification effect).

Furthermore, the execution method (timer execution mode) of the timer execution may differ depending on whether the timer execution is performed during a variation animation that starts when no timer hold icon notification is displayed (variation animation when timer hold is not displayed) or during a variation animation that results from the consumption of a timer hold (notified hold). For example, when the timer execution is performed during a variation animation from a state where the timer hold is not displayed, the timer execution may be performed in a mode (first timer execution mode) where the timer execution image is displayed in an area of the display screen 7a other than the animation hold display area (not shown). When the timer execution is performed during a variation animation that results from the consumption of a timer hold, the timer execution may be performed in a mode (second timer execution mode) where the variation hold icon is displayed as a timer shape (timer execution image), as shown in Figure 57(2), etc. This makes it possible to increase the variations of the timer execution.

Here, the microcontroller 91 for controlling the effects, which executes the timer-based effects processing (S5000), functions as a "period-based effects execution means."

[Notification at the start of fluctuations]
The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a total of four types of notifications at the start of a spin: a step-up notification (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "SU notification"), a dialogue notification, a button notification, and a special sound notification.

The "Reel Start Notification" is a notification effect that takes place after the start of the reel spinning effect (reel spinning display) until the first stop symbol (for example, the left effect symbol 8L) stops (temporarily stops) (9 seconds in this embodiment). In other words, the execution period of the Reel Start Notification is from the start of the reel spinning until a maximum of 9 seconds have elapsed. The execution periods (execution times) of the SU notification, dialogue notification, button notification, and special sound notification should be set to fit within the execution period of the Reel Start Notification (a maximum of 9 seconds in this embodiment), and may be the same or different for each notification.

The SU予告 (SU予告) is a type of予告演出 (preview/announcement) that involves a series of animations, from the first stage to multiple stages, in a step-by-step manner. It suggests that the probability of a big win increases as the stages (steps) progress.

As shown in Figures 60(1) to (3), in this embodiment, the SU (Super Ultra)予告 (SU) is performed by displaying the performance images (stage images) 901 to 903 corresponding to each stage from the first stage (step 1) to the third stage (step 3) sequentially on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the display size of the performance images (stage images) for each stage increases (changes) in the order of the first stage (step 1), second stage (step 2), and third stage (step 3), and the display content of the performance images (stage images) for each stage also differs (changes).

There are three types of SU (Super Ultra) announcements: SU Announcement A, which ends in the first stage (see Figure 60(1)); SU Announcement B, which ends in the second stage (see Figure 60(2)); and SU Announcement C, which ends in the third stage (see Figure 60(3)). The level of expectation increases in the order of SU Announcement A, SU Announcement B, and SU Announcement C. Specifically, SU Announcement A is a low-expectancy type of announcement (low-expectancy announcement), SU Announcement B is a medium-expectancy type of announcement (medium-expectancy announcement), and SU Announcement C is a high-expectancy type of announcement (high-expectancy announcement).

As shown in Figure 61, the dialogue preview is a preview effect that displays a visual image (subtitle display) 904, which shows the character's dialogue in subtitle format, on the display screen 7a. The color of the subtitle display in the visual image 904 indicates the level of anticipation.

There are three types of dialogue previews: Dialogue Preview A, where the subtitles are white (white subtitles); Dialogue Preview B, where the subtitles are blue (blue subtitles); and Dialogue Preview C, where the subtitles are red (red subtitles). The previews are structured so that the level of expectation increases in the order of Dialogue Preview A, Dialogue Preview B, and Dialogue Preview C. Specifically, Dialogue Preview A is a low-expectation preview, Dialogue Preview B is a medium-expectation preview, and Dialogue Preview C is a high-expectation preview.

A button notification is a notification effect performed using a special button, and the content of the operation-dependent effect (effect) executed based on the operation of the special button indicates the level of expectation. In this embodiment, the button notification is performed using the first special button 63a. Alternatively, the button notification may be performed using the second special button 63b.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 62(1), a performance image (operation instruction image) 905, which includes an image resembling the first performance button 63a (button image) and an image indicating the operation acceptance period (gauge image), is displayed on the display screen 7a. Based on the operation of the first performance button 63a within the operation acceptance period indicated by the gauge image included in the performance image 905 (for example, within 3 seconds) (the first performance button detection switch 63c detects the operation of the first performance button 63a), a performance image (suggestion image) indicating the level of expectation is displayed on the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 62(2), the button notification features include: Button Notification A, which displays an image 906 (first suggestion image) showing the words "Fight!" based on the operation of the first performance button 63a; Button Notification B, which displays an image 907 (second suggestion image) showing the words "Chance!" based on the operation of the first performance button 63a; and Button Notification C, which displays an image 908 (third suggestion image) showing the words "Hot!!" based on the operation of the first performance button 63a. The expectation level increases in the order of Button Notification A, Button Notification B, and Button Notification C. In other words, Button Notification A is a low-expectation notification, Button Notification B is a medium-expectation notification, and Button Notification C is a high-expectation notification. Figure 62(1) shows the display of image 907 (second suggestion image) based on the operation of the first performance button 63a (medium-expectation notification).

The special sound notification is a notification effect (a notification effect using sound) that is performed by outputting a predetermined sound effect from speaker 67, and this sound effect suggests that a jackpot is confirmed. Specifically, it outputs sound effects such as "kyuin kyuin kyuin" or "pikon pikon pikon". The special sound notification can only be output if the current spin (the spin in question) is a jackpot spin, and will not be output for losing spins. Therefore, the special sound notification is a notification effect with a 100% expectation rate (also called a "jackpot confirmation notification"), that is, an effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (special game state) (jackpot confirmed) (also called a "special suggestion effect"). Note that notification effects that suggest a jackpot (jackpot confirmation notification) are not limited to those that output a special sound; for example, they may also include those that display a special effect image (premium effect image) that suggests a jackpot (display effect).

As mentioned above, since the variation start notification is an effect that can be executed as such, the effect control microcontroller 91 performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the variation start notification and, if so, the notification pattern (i.e., the notification pattern for the variation start notification) in the notification effect setting processing (S4506) within the variation effect start processing (S4402). Specifically, it performs the variation start notification processing (S5100) shown in Figure 45. The variation start notification processing (S5100) is performed after the timer effect processing (S5000) mentioned above.

As shown in Figure 45, the fluctuation start notification process (S5100) first determines whether execution pattern A is set as the execution pattern for the timer effect for the current fluctuation effect (S5101). When the timer effect is to be executed, the timer effect execution pattern is set in S5012, and S5101 determines whether execution pattern A was set in S5012. This determination can be made, for example, by referring to a predetermined area of RAM (setting content storage area) that stores the settings for the timer effect execution pattern set in S5012.

If it is determined that execution pattern A is set as the execution pattern for the timer effect (YES in S5101), that is, if the timer effect is executed (started) from the start of the variation in this variation effect, in other words, if the timer effect is executed for approximately 10 seconds from the start of the variation, then the variation start notification determination table A shown in Figure 51 is set (S5102). On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that execution pattern A is not set (NO in S5101), that is, if the timer effect is started at a time other than the start of the variation in this variation effect, or if the timer effect is not executed, then the variation start notification determination table B shown in Figure 52 is set (S5103).

Furthermore, if the timer effect is initiated at a time other than the start of the reel spin, the start time is when the first stop symbol stops or when a winning combination is achieved. In this case, the timer effect, i.e., the timer effect using execution pattern B or C, will run for a longer period (approximately 21 seconds or approximately 20 seconds: the second predetermined period) than the timer effect using execution pattern A (approximately 10 seconds: the first predetermined period).

Next, in S5104, a determination is made based on the random number used to determine the start of the variation announcement, using the table set in S5102 or S5103 (S5104). The random number used to determine the start of the variation announcement is a type of random number used to determine the performance, obtained in S4501, and takes values within the range of "0 to 199".

Table A, which determines the timing of the timer effect at the start of the reel spin, is used when the timer effect is to start executing at the start of the reel spin. Table B, which determines the timing of the timer effect at the start of the reel spin, is used when the timer effect is not to start executing at the start of the reel spin, but is to start executing when the first stop symbol stops or when a reach is established. In other words, Table B, which determines the timing of the timer effect at the start of the reel spin, is used at least when the timer effect is not to start executing at the start of the reel spin. Note that the tables shown in Figures 51 and 52 are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 51, the variation start notification determination table A of this embodiment is configured by assigning random values for variation start notification determination to "not executed," "SU notification A-C," "button notification A-C," "dialogue notification A-C," and "special sound notification," respectively, for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7 (see Figures 9A and 50), which are selectable when executing (starting) the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state).

As shown in Figure 52, the variation start notification determination table B of this embodiment is configured by assigning random values for variation start notification determination to "not executed," "SU notification A-C," "button notification A-C," "dialogue notification A-C," and "special sound notification," respectively, for special symbol variation patterns P1-P7 in which a timer effect may be executed and special symbol variation patterns P8-P10 in which a timer effect may not be executed (see Figures 9A and 50).

In the tables shown in Figures 51 and 52, "Not Executed" means that the notification at the start of the fluctuation will not be executed (not executed pattern for notification at the start of the fluctuation). A "-" in the same table means that no random value for determining the notification at the start of the fluctuation has been assigned; in other words, the notification pattern corresponding to "-" is not selected (not a target for selection).

According to the variation start notification determination table A of this embodiment, the proportion of variation start notification patterns (also called "variation start notification patterns") determined to be "not executed" (variation start notification non-execution patterns) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation performance (specified by the variation pattern specification command included in the variation start command received in S4401 above) is P7 (NM reach failure variation). The proportion decreases in the following order: P6 (SP reach failure variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms), P4, P5 (SP reach failure variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms), and P1 to P3 (jackpot variation). The proportion is the same for P1, P2 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms).

Furthermore, if the pre-change notification is executed (i.e., not decided as "not executed"), the determination ratio for the pre-change notification pattern will be as follows:

The probability of selecting "SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A" (the execution rate of SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to the current variation is P7 (NM reach failure variation), followed by P6 (SP reach failure variation with a variation time of 45,000ms), P4 and P5 (SP reach failure variation with a variation time of 75,000ms), P3 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 45,000ms), and P1 and P2 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 75,000ms), in that order, with the probability decreasing.

The probability of selecting "SU予告B, Dialogue予告B, or Button予告B" (the execution rate of SU予告B, Dialogue予告B, or Button予告B) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation is P1, P2 (a big win variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (a big win variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms). The probability decreases in the following order: P4, P5 (a variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms where the SP reach fails), P6 (a variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms where the SP reach fails), and P7 (a variation where the NM reach fails).

The probability of determining "SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C" (the execution rate of SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation is P1 or P2 (a big win variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms). This is followed by P3 (a big win variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms), P4 and P5 (a variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms where the SP reach fails), and P6 (a variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms where the SP reach fails). In the case of P7 (a variation where the NM reach fails), "SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C" is not determined (determination rate 0%).

The "Special Sound Announcement" is only determined when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation is P1 to P3 (jackpot variation). The determination rate (execution rate) is the same for P1 and P2 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms).

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern for this variation effect is P1 or P2, the probability of it being determined as "SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C" is the highest, followed by "SU予告B, Dialogue予告B, or Button予告B," "Special Sound予告," and then "SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A," in decreasing order of probability. When it's P3, the probability of it being determined as "SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C" is the highest, followed by "SU予告B, Dialogue予告B, or Button予告B," "Special Sound予告," and then "SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A," in decreasing order of probability (the probability of it being determined as "Special Sound予告" is the same as the probability of it being determined as "SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A").

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P4 to P6, the probability of it being determined as "SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A" is the highest, followed by "SU予告B, Dialogue予告B, or Button予告B," and then "SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C," with the probability decreasing in that order. It will never be determined as "Special Sound予告."

Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern for this variation is P7, the probability of it being determined as "SU予告A, Dialogue予告A, or Button予告A" is higher than the probability of it being determined as "SU予告B, Dialogue予告B, or Button予告B," and it will never be determined as "SU予告C, Dialogue予告C, or Button予告C" or as a "Special Sound予告."

On the other hand, according to the variation start notification determination table B (see Figure 52) of this embodiment, the proportion of variation start notification patterns determined as "not executed" (variation start notification not executed pattern) is higher than that of variation start notification determination table A (see Figure 51) for all variation patterns. In other words, in this variation effect, if the timer effect is not started at the start of the variation, the proportion of variation start notification execution is lower than when the timer effect is executed at the start of the variation.

Furthermore, in the reel start notification determination table B, if the special reel reel reel pattern for this reel reel performance is P9 or P10 (no reach, shortened, and unsuccessful reel reel), the reel start notification pattern is always determined to be "not executed" (reel start notification not executed pattern), and the reel start notification will not be executed in a shortened, unsuccessful reel reel. Also, if the special reel reel reel pattern for this reel performance is P8 (no reach, and unsuccessful reel reel), the reel start notification pattern is always determined to be "SU notification A, dialogue notification A, or button notification A".

Furthermore, in the Start of Variation Notification Determination Table B, when the special symbol variation pattern related to the current variation is P1 to P7 (reach or higher), the determination ratios for "SU Notification A, Dialogue Notification A, or Button Notification A," "SU Notification B, Dialogue Notification B, or Button Notification B," "SU Notification C, Dialogue Notification C, or Button Notification C," and "Special Sound Notification" differ slightly from those in the Start of Variation Notification Determination Table A (sometimes they are the same, sometimes they are different), but the relative levels of their determination ratios are the same as in the Start of Variation Notification Determination Table A.

According to the above-described tables A and B for determining the start of the variation, the probability of winning increases in the following order: "SU Notification A, Dialogue Notification A, or Button Notification A," "SU Notification B, Dialogue Notification B, or Button Notification B," "SU Notification C, Dialogue Notification C, or Button Notification C," and "Special Sound Notification." In other words, "SU Notification A, Dialogue Notification A, and Button Notification A" are low-probability notifications with relatively low expectations, "SU Notification B, Dialogue Notification B, and Button Notification B" are medium-probability notifications with intermediate expectations, "SU Notification C, Dialogue Notification C, and Button Notification C" are high-probability notifications with relatively high expectations, and "Special Sound Notification" is a 100% probability jackpot-guaranteed notification. Note that if 100% probability is included in high-probability, then the Special Sound Notification (jackpot-guaranteed notification) can be considered a type of high-probability notification.

Furthermore, in this variation animation (variation period), the execution rate of the variation start notification differs depending on whether the timer animation according to execution pattern A is executed (the timer animation starts at the start of the variation) or not (the timer animation does not start at the start of the variation) (see Figures 51 and 52). In other words, during the period from the start of the variation until the first stop symbol stops (also called the "initial variation period"), it is possible to execute the variation start notification at different rates depending on whether the timer animation is running or not. Specifically, the execution rate of the variation start notification is higher when the timer animation starts at the start of the variation compared to when the timer animation does not start at the start of the variation. That is, when the timer animation is running during the initial variation period, it is possible to execute the variation start notification at a higher rate compared to when the timer animation is not running during the initial variation period.

This makes it possible to attract players' interest in the situation of the pre-announcement effects when the variation effect (variation display) begins, such as whether or not a pre-announcement is performed at the start of the variation effect, the nature of the pre-announcement if it is performed, and whether or not the pre-announcement and timer effect overlap, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, for timer effects performed during the initial period of variation (low-expectation timer effects), the pre-announcement at the start of the variation effect is more likely to occur simultaneously, thus enhancing the effect of the effects during the initial period of variation.

Furthermore, the system may be configured such that the execution rate of the pre-announcement at the start of a spin is lower when the timer effect starts at the beginning of a spin compared to when it does not. In this case, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention to the timer effect during the initial stages of the spin.

Furthermore, focusing on the duration of the timer effect, the execution rate of the pre-announcement at the start of the variation differs depending on whether the timer effect is executed for approximately 10 seconds from the start of the variation (first predetermined period) (execution pattern A) or for approximately 21 seconds from the stop of the first stop symbol (temporary stop) or approximately 20 seconds from the establishment of a reach (second predetermined period) (execution pattern B or C). Specifically, the execution rate of the pre-announcement at the start of the variation is higher when the timer effect has a relatively shorter execution period (first predetermined period) (when the timer effect is executed according to execution pattern A) compared to when the timer effect has a relatively longer execution period (second predetermined period) (when the timer effect is executed according to execution pattern B or C). As a result, pre-announcements at the start of the variation are more likely to be executed simultaneously for timer effects with relatively short execution periods (timer effects with low expectation levels), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the system may be configured such that the execution rate of the pre-announcement at the start of a variation is lower when the timer effect has a relatively short execution period (the first predetermined period) compared to when the timer effect has a relatively long execution period (the second predetermined period). In this case, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest more easily to the timer effect with a relatively short execution period.

Returning to Figure 45, if the result of the S5104 determination is that the fluctuation start notification should not be executed (NO in S5105), this process ends without performing the S5106 process. If the fluctuation start notification should be executed (YES in S5105), the fluctuation start notification pattern determined (selected) based on fluctuation start notification determination table A or B is set (S5106), and this process ends.

The variation start notification pattern set in S5106 is included in the variation performance start command set in S4507. When this variation performance start command is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the variation start notification corresponding to the variation start notification pattern identified based on the received variation performance start command from the ROM of the image control board 100. The microcomputer then executes the variation start notification (one of the notification displays shown in Figures 60 to 62) using the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Notification when a winning combination is achieved]
In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is capable of executing a total of three types of notifications when a reach is established: a first character notification, a second character notification, and a group notification.

The "Reach Establishment Notification" is a notification animation that occurs after the start of the reel spinning animation (reel spinning display), when the first stop symbol (for example, the left reel symbol 8L) and the second stop symbol (for example, the right reel symbol 8R) stop (temporarily stop) on the reach symbols (for example, symbols with the same number on both sides), that is, at the moment a reach is established (when a reach is established).

The first character予告 (preview) is a preview effect that displays a performance image (character image) 909 representing a predetermined character (for example, character A) on the display screen 7a when a reach is achieved, as shown in Figure 63(1).

The second character予告 (preview) is a preview effect that displays a performance image (character image) 910 representing a predetermined character (for example, character B) on the display screen 7a when a reach is achieved, as shown in Figure 63(2).

The group予告 (group announcement) is a notification feature that displays a group image 911 representing a predetermined group of characters on the display screen 7a when a reach is achieved, as shown in Figure 63(3). In this embodiment, the group announcement is performed in a manner in which the group image 911 moves behind the symbol 8 from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a (moving display).

In this embodiment, the notification system is configured such that the first character notification is a low-expectation notification, the second character notification is a medium-expectation notification, and the group notification is a high-expectation notification.

As mentioned above, since the reach-establishment notification is an effect that can be executed as a variation notification (notification effect), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the reach-establishment notification and, if so, the notification pattern (i.e., the notification pattern for the reach-establishment notification) in the notification effect setting processing (S4506) within the variation effect start processing (S4402). Specifically, it performs the reach-establishment notification processing (S5200) shown in Figure 46. The reach-establishment notification processing (S5200) is performed after the variation start notification processing (S5100) mentioned above.

As shown in Figure 46, the reach-establishment notification process (S5200) first determines whether a variation start notification pattern has been set for the current variation animation, that is, whether or not to execute the variation start notification (S5201). This determination can be made, for example, by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM (setting content storage area) that stores the settings of the variation start notification pattern set in S5106.

If it is determined in S5201 that no notification pattern is set at the start of the variation (i.e., the notification at the start of the variation will not be executed) (NO in S5201), then the notification determination table A at the start of the reach shown in Figure 53(1) is set (S5202).

In contrast, if it is determined that a pre-announcement pattern for the start of a variation has been set (the pre-announcement for the start of a variation will be executed) (YES in S5201), it is determined whether that pre-announcement pattern for the start of a variation is a high-expectation pre-announcement or a guaranteed jackpot pre-announcement (S5203). Here, a high-expectation pre-announcement is one of the following: SU pre-announcement C, dialogue pre-announcement C, or button pre-announcement C (see Figures 51 and 52).

If the result of the S5203 judgment determines that the set starting notification pattern is neither a high-expectation notification nor a guaranteed jackpot notification (NO in S5203), i.e., a low-expectation notification or a medium-expectation notification, then the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B shown in Figure 53(2) is set (S5204). If it is determined to be a high-expectation notification or a guaranteed jackpot notification (YES in S5203), then the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table C shown in Figure 53(3) is set (S5205).

Next, in S5206, a determination is made using a random number for determining the reach-establishment notification, based on the notification determination table set in S5202, S5204, or S5205 (S5206). The random number for determining the reach-establishment notification is a type of random number for determining the presentation, obtained in S4501, and takes values within the range of "0 to 99".

Table A, used when no pre-announcement is performed at the start of a spin, Table B, used when a low-probability or medium-probability pre-announcement is performed at the start of a spin, and Table C, used when a high-probability pre-announcement or a guaranteed win pre-announcement is performed at the start of a spin. Note that the tables shown in Figures 53(1) to (3) are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figures 53(1) and (2), the reach-establishment notification determination tables A and B of this embodiment are special symbol variation patterns that can be selected when the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) is executed (started) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). For special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7 (see Figure 9A) in which a reach performance (NM reach performance or SP reach performance) is executed, random values for determining the reach-establishment notification are assigned to "not executed," "first character notification," "second character notification," and "group notification," respectively.

As shown in Figure 53(3), the reach-establishment notification determination table C of this embodiment is a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected when the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) is executed (started) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). For special symbol variation patterns P1 to P6 (see Figure 9A) in which the SP reach effect is executed, random values for determining the reach-establishment notification are assigned to "not executed," "first character notification," "second character notification," and "group notification," respectively.

In the tables shown in Figures 53(1) to (3), "Not Executed" means that the notification when a reach is achieved will not be executed (reach formation notification not executed pattern). A "-" in the same table means that no random value for determining the reach formation notification has been assigned; in other words, the notification pattern corresponding to "-" is not selected (not a selection target).

According to the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table A of this embodiment, the proportion of times the notification pattern for the reach establishment notification (also called the "reach establishment notification pattern") is determined to be "not executed" (reach establishment notification non-execution pattern) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation performance (the special symbol variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command included in the variation start command received in S4401 above) is P7 (NM reach failure variation). The proportion decreases in the following order: P6 (SP reach failure variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms), P4, P5 (SP reach failure variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms), and P1 to P3 (jackpot variation). The proportion is the same for P1, P2 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms).

Furthermore, if a reach-in-progress notification is executed (i.e., not decided as "not executed"), the probability of determining the reach-in-progress notification pattern is as follows:

The percentage of times the "First Character Announcement" is selected (the execution rate of the First Character Announcement) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation is P7 (NM Reach Failure Variation), followed by P6 (SP Reach Failure Variation with a variation time of 45,000ms), P4 and P5 (SP Reach Failure Variation with a variation time of 75,000ms), P3 (Big Win Variation with a variation time of 45,000ms), and P1 and P2 (Big Win Variation with a variation time of 75,000ms), in that order, with the percentage decreasing in that order.

The percentage of times the "Second Character Announcement" is selected (the execution rate of the Second Character Announcement) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation is P1, P2 (a big win variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (a big win variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms). The percentage decreases in the following order: P4, P5 (a variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms where the SP reach fails), P6 (a variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms where the SP reach fails), and P7 (a variation where the NM reach fails).

The probability of a "group announcement" being triggered (the execution rate of group announcements) is highest when the special symbol variation pattern related to the current variation is P1 or P2 (a big win variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms). This is followed by P3 (a big win variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms), P4 and P5 (a variation with a variation time of 75,000 ms where the SP reach fails), and P6 (a variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms where the SP reach fails). In the case of P7 (a variation where the NM reach fails), a "group announcement" is not triggered (determination rate 0%).

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern related to this variation effect is P1 to P3, the probability of it being determined as a "group announcement" is the highest, followed by "second character announcement" and then "first character announcement," in decreasing order of probability. When it's P4 to P6, the probability of it being determined as a "first character announcement" is the highest, followed by "second character announcement" and then "group announcement," in decreasing order of probability. When it's P7, the probability of it being determined as a "first character announcement" is higher than the probability of it being determined as a "second character announcement," and it will never be determined as a "group announcement."

On the other hand, according to the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B of this embodiment (see Figure 53(2)), the proportion of Reach Establishment Notification Patterns determined to be "Not Executed" (Reach Establishment Notification Not Executed Pattern) is higher than that of the Start of Variation Notification Determination Table A (see Figure 53(1)) for all variation patterns. In other words, in this variation performance, when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed as the Start of Variation Notification, the proportion of Reach Establishment Notifications executed afterward is lower than when no Start of Variation Notification is executed.

Furthermore, in the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B, the determination rates for "First Character Notification" and "Second Character Notification" when a Reach Establishment Notification is executed (i.e., not determined to be "not executed") are lower than in the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table A. The determination rate for "Group Notification" is the same as that for "Group Notification" in the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table A, and the relative levels of the determination rates for each notification are the same as in the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table A.

Furthermore, according to the Reach Establishment Notification Decision Table C of this embodiment (see Figure 53(3)), the proportion of Reach Establishment Notification Patterns determined to be "Not Executed" (Reach Establishment Notification Non-Executed Patterns) is higher for all of the Special Symbol Variation Patterns P1 to P6 compared to the Variation Start Notification Decision Table A (see Figure 53(1)). Compared to the Variation Start Notification Decision Table B (see Figure 53(2)), the proportion is the same for Special Symbol Variation Patterns P1 to P3 as in the Reach Establishment Notification Decision Table B, while the proportion is higher for Special Symbol Variation Patterns P4 to P6 than in the Variation Start Notification Decision Table B.

In other words, in this variation sequence, if a high-expectation or guaranteed win notification is executed as the start-of-spin notification (i.e., an SP reach is confirmed), the probability of a reach establishment notification being executed afterward is lower than when no start-of-spin notification is executed (see Figures 53(1) and (3)). Furthermore, if this variation sequence is an SP reach failure variation sequence (SP reach failure variation sequence), the probability of a reach establishment notification being executed in that variation sequence is lower than when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed as the start-of-spin notification (see Figures 53(2) and (3)).

Furthermore, in the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table C, when a reach establishment notification is executed (i.e., not determined to be "not executed"), the determination rate for the "First Character Notification" is lower for all special symbol variation patterns P1 to P6 compared to the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B. On the other hand, the determination rate for the "Second Character Notification" is higher for all special symbol variation patterns P1 to P6 than the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B, and the same as the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table A. The determination rate for the "Group Notification" is higher for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot variation) than the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Tables A and B, and the same as the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Tables A and B for special symbol variation patterns P4 to P6 (SP reach failure variation).

In other words, in this variation animation, if a high-probability or guaranteed-win prediction is executed as the start-up prediction for the variation, the probability of the first character prediction being executed as the reach-establishment prediction will be lower than in the cases where no prediction is executed at the start of the variation, or where a low-probability or medium-probability prediction is executed at the start of the variation.

Furthermore, in this variation animation, when a high-expectation or guaranteed-win notification is executed as the initial notification at the start of the variation, the probability of a second character notification being executed as the subsequent reach-establishment notification is the same as when no initial notification is executed (see Figure 53 (1)), and higher than when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed at the start of the variation (see Figure 53 (2)).

Furthermore, in this variation sequence, if a high-expectation or guaranteed-win prediction is executed as the start-of-variation prediction, the probability of a group prediction being executed as the reach-establishment prediction will be higher than in cases where no prediction is executed at the start of the variation (see Figure 53(1)) or where a low-expectation or medium-expectation prediction is executed at the start of the variation (see Figure 53(2)), provided that the variation sequence is a jackpot variation sequence (also called a "jackpot variation sequence").

According to the above-described Reach Establishment Notification Tables A-C, the likelihood of a big win increases in the following order: "First Character Notification," "Second Character Notification," and "Group Notification." In other words, the "First Character Notification" is a low-probability notification with a relatively low expectation, the "Second Character Notification" is a medium-probability notification with an intermediate expectation, and the "Group Notification" is a high-probability notification with a relatively high expectation.

Furthermore, when a high-expectation or guaranteed-win notification is executed as a notification at the start of a variation performance (variation display), the probability of a low-expectation notification being executed as a notification when a reach is established is lower than in the case where no notification is executed at the start of the variation performance, or when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed at the start of the variation performance. In other words, when a variation start notification (first suggestion performance) with an expectation level higher than a medium expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is executed at the start of a variation performance (first predetermined time within the variation period), the execution of a reach establishment notification (second suggestion performance) with an expectation level lower than a medium expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is suppressed when a reach is established during that variation performance (second predetermined time within the variation period).

This prevents the player's heightened expectation of a big win, which is heightened by the high-expectation-level notification at the start of a single variation sequence (variation period), from being diminished by subsequent notifications upon the establishment of a winning combination, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table C, the determination rate for the first character notification (low expectation notification) may be set to 0%, so that if a high expectation notification is executed at the start of the spin, the low expectation notification will not be executed as a reach establishment notification. In other words, by setting the execution rate of the low expectation notification at reach establishment to 0%, the execution of low expectation reach establishment notifications (second suggestive effects) may be suppressed. This also helps to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game by not diminishing the player's sense of anticipation heightened by the high expectation notification at the start of the spin.

Furthermore, when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed as a notification at the start of a variation sequence, the probability of a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification being executed as a notification when a reach is achieved is lower than when no notification is executed at the start of a variation sequence. In other words, when a medium-expectation (predetermined expectation) or a variation start notification (first suggestion notification) with an expectation lower than a medium-expectation (predetermined expectation) is executed at the start of a variation sequence (first predetermined time within the variation period), the execution of a notification notification that suggests an expectation level similar to the variation start notification is suppressed when a reach is achieved in that variation sequence (second predetermined time within the variation period).

This means that if a low- or medium-expected probability pre-announcement is executed during a single variation sequence (variation period), it becomes less likely that a similar suggestive pre-announcement (expected probability) will be executed when a reach is established. Therefore, it becomes less likely that players will experience disappointment or frustration from the repetition of pre-announcements with relatively low expectations.

Furthermore, if a high-expectation notification is executed as a notification at the start of a variation sequence, and that variation sequence is a jackpot variation sequence, the probability of a high-expectation notification (group notification) being executed as a notification when a reach is achieved will be higher than in the case where no notification is executed at the start of the variation sequence, or when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed at the start of the variation sequence. In other words, if a variation start notification (first suggestion sequence) with an expectation level higher than a medium expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is executed at the start of a jackpot variation sequence (first predetermined time within the variation period), the execution of a reach-establishment notification (second suggestion sequence) with an expectation level higher than a medium expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is promoted when a reach is achieved in that variation sequence (second predetermined time within the variation period).

This allows for an improved gaming experience when a high-expectation notification is displayed at the start of a variation sequence (variation period), thereby increasing the player's anticipation for a big win, which is heightened by the high-expectation notification, and further enhancing it with subsequent notifications (high-expectation notifications) when a reach is established.

Furthermore, within a single variation sequence (variation period), the probability of a reach-establishment announcement being executed is higher (the reach-establishment announcement is more likely to be executed) when the variation start announcement is not executed compared to when the variation start announcement is executed (see Figures 53 (1) to (3)). This allows players to maintain interest in the possibility of a reach-establishment (reach occurrence) even if the variation start announcement is not executed.

Returning to Figure 46, if the result of the S5206 determination is that the reach-establishment notification should not be executed (NO in S5207), this process ends without performing the S5208 process. If the reach-establishment notification should be executed (YES in S5207), the reach-establishment notification pattern determined (selected) based on one of the reach-establishment notification determination tables A to C is set (S5208), and this process ends.

The reach-establishment notification pattern set in S5208 is included in the variation performance start command set in S4507. When this variation performance start command is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the reach-establishment notification corresponding to the reach-establishment notification pattern identified based on the received variation performance start command from the ROM of the image control board 100. The microcomputer then executes the reach-establishment notification (one of the notification displays shown in Figures 63(1) to (3)) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 using the read image data.

[SP Development Warning]
In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is capable of executing a total of three types of previews as SP development previews: title preview (white), title preview (red), and title preview (gold).

The SP development予告 (SP development notification) is a notification that occurs when the reach animation, which takes place after the start of the variation animation (variation display) and after a reach is established, develops (transitions) from the NM reach animation to the SP reach animation (during SP development).

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with multiple types of SP reach sequences with different stories (presentation patterns) (for example, an SP reach sequence for story A1, an SP reach sequence for story A2, etc.). In this embodiment, each of these multiple types of SP reach sequences with different stories is given a title corresponding to the story.

The title announcement, as shown in Figures 64(1) to (3), is a notification effect performed during the progression of the variable performance, at the timing when a reach is established and the SP reach is to be developed (transitioned). It displays a performance image (title display) 912 representing the title of the SP reach performance that is about to be executed (started) on the display screen 7a (see Figure 64(2)). The color of the title display (text) included in the performance image 912 indicates the level of expectation.

There are three types of title previews: Title Preview A, where the title is displayed in white; Title Preview B, where the title is displayed in red; and Title Preview C, where the title is displayed in gold. The level of expectation increases in the order of Title Preview A, Title Preview B, and Title Preview C. Specifically, Title Preview A is a low-expectation preview, Title Preview B is a medium-expectation preview, and Title Preview C is a high-expectation preview.

As mentioned above, since the SP development notification is an effect that can be executed as a variation notification (notification effect), the microcontroller 91 for effect control performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the SP development notification and, if so, the notification pattern (i.e., the notification pattern for the SP development notification) in the notification effect setting processing (S4506) within the variation effect start processing (S4402). Specifically, it performs the SP development notification processing (S5300) shown in Figure 47. The SP development notification processing (S5300) is performed following the aforementioned reach establishment notification processing (S5200).

As shown in Figure 47, the SP development notification process (S5300) is basically the same as the reach establishment notification process (S5200) described above. That is, in the SP development notification process (S5300), it is first determined whether or not the variation start notification pattern for the current variation performance was set in S5106 (i.e., whether or not to execute the variation start notification) (S5301).

As a result, if it is determined that no pre-announcement pattern is set at the start of the variation (the pre-announcement at the start of the variation will not be executed) (NO in S5301), the SP development pre-announcement determination table A shown in Figure 54(1) is set (S5302). If it is determined that a pre-announcement pattern is set (the pre-announcement at the start of the variation will be executed) (YES in S5301), and it is determined that the pre-announcement pattern is neither a high-expectancy pre-announcement nor a guaranteed jackpot pre-announcement (it is a low-expectancy or medium-expectancy pre-announcement) (NO in S5303), the SP development pre-announcement determination table B shown in Figure 54(2) is set (S5304). If it is determined that it is a high-expectancy pre-announcement or a guaranteed jackpot pre-announcement (YES in S5303), the SP development pre-announcement determination table C shown in Figure 54(3) is set (S5305).

Next, in S5306, a determination is made using a random number for determining the SP development notification, based on the SP development notification determination table set in S5302, S5304, or S5305 (S5306). The random number for determining the SP development notification is a type of random number for determining the performance obtained in S4501, and its value can be, for example, in the range of "0 to 99".

Table A for determining the SP development notification is used when no notification is executed at the start of the variation; Table B for determining the SP development notification is used when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed as the notification at the start of the variation; and Table C for determining the SP development notification is used when a high-expectation notification or a guaranteed jackpot notification is executed as the notification at the start of the variation. Note that the tables shown in Figures 54(1) to (3) are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figures 54(1) to (3), the SP development notification determination tables A to C of this embodiment are special symbol variation patterns that can be selected when the variation display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) is executed (started) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state). For special symbol variation patterns P1 to P6 (see Figure 9A) in which the SP reach effect is executed, the random values for determining the SP development notification are assigned to "not executed," "title notification A," "title notification B," and "title notification C," respectively.

In the tables shown in Figures 54(1) to (3), "Not Executed" means that the SP development notification will not be executed (SP development notification not executed pattern). A "-" in the same table means that no random value for determining the SP development notification has been assigned; in other words, the notification pattern corresponding to "-" is not selected (not a selection target).

In the SP development notification determination tables A to C shown in Figures 54(1) to (3), the number of random values assigned to each notification pattern (determination ratio for each notification pattern) for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P6—"Not Executed," "Title Notification A" (low expectation level notification), "Title Notification B" (medium expectation level notification), and "Title Notification C" (high expectation level notification)—is the same as the number of random values assigned to each notification pattern (determination ratio for each notification pattern) for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P6—"Not Executed," "First Character Notification" (low expectation level notification), "Second Character Notification" (medium expectation level notification), and "Group Notification" (high expectation level notification)—in the reach establishment notification determination tables A to C shown in Figures 53(1) to (3).

Therefore, the determination of each予告 (preview) pattern using SP development preview determination tables A to C is the same as the determination of each preview pattern using reach establishment preview determination tables A to C (reach establishment preview determination tables A and B exclude special symbol variation pattern P7). Furthermore, the same effects and advantages as those described above for reach establishment previews are obtained for SP development previews.

In other words, if a high-expectation notification is executed at the start of a single variation sequence (variation period), it becomes possible to prevent the player's heightened expectation of a big win, which is heightened by the high-expectation notification, from being frequently diminished by subsequent special feature development notifications, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a low-expectation or medium-expectation notification is executed as a notification at the start of a variation sequence, the probability of a low-expectation notification (Title Notification A) or a medium-expectation notification (Title Notification B) being executed as a notification during subsequent SP development is configured to be lower than when no notification is executed at the start of a variation sequence. In other words, when a variation start notification (first suggestion notification) with an expectation level lower than medium-expectation (predetermined expectation) is executed at the start of a variation sequence (first predetermined time within the variation period), the execution of a notification notification that suggests an expectation level similar to the variation start notification is suppressed during the SP development of that variation sequence (second predetermined time within the variation period).

This makes it less likely that a similar SP development予告 (special effect) will be executed when a low- or medium-expected probability pre-announcement is performed during a single variation sequence (variation period). Therefore, it becomes less likely that players will experience disappointment or frustration from the repetition of pre-announcements with relatively low expectations.

Furthermore, when a high-expectation announcement is executed as a pre-announcement at the start of a variation sequence, and that variation sequence is a jackpot variation sequence, the probability of a high-expectation announcement (title announcement C) being executed as a pre-announcement during the subsequent SP development is higher than in the case where no pre-announcement is executed at the start of the variation sequence, or when a low-expectation or medium-expectation announcement is executed at the start of the variation sequence. In other words, when a high-expectation pre-announcement (first suggestion sequence) with a higher expectation level than a medium-expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is executed at the start of a jackpot variation sequence (first predetermined time within the variation period), the execution of a high-expectation pre-announcement (second suggestion sequence) with a higher expectation level than a medium-expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is promoted during the SP development of that variation sequence (second predetermined time within the variation period).

This allows for an improvement in gameplay enjoyment when, during a single variation sequence (variation period), a high-expectation notification is executed at the start of the variation. The increased anticipation of the player regarding a jackpot, heightened by this notification, can then be further enhanced by subsequent special feature (SP) development notifications (high-expectation notifications).

Furthermore, within a single variation sequence (variation period), the probability of an SP development announcement being executed is higher (the SP development announcement is more likely to be executed) when the variation start announcement is not executed compared to when the variation start announcement is executed (see Figures 54 (1) to (3)). This allows players to maintain interest in the SP reach development even if the variation start announcement is not executed.

Returning to Figure 47, if the result of the S5306 determination is that the SP development notification should not be executed (NO in S5307), this process ends without performing the S5308 process. If the SP development notification should be executed (YES in S5307), the SP development notification pattern determined (selected) based on one of the SP development notification determination tables A to C is set (S5308), and this process ends.

The SP development予告 pattern set in S5308 is included in the variation performance start command set in S4507. When this variation performance start command is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the SP development予告 corresponding to the SP development予告 pattern identified based on the received variation performance start command from the ROM of the image control board 100. The SP development予告 (preview display shown in Figure 64(2)) based on the read image data is then executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

According to the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment described above, when a variation effect is initiated, timer effect execution pattern A is set in S5012 of the timer effect processing (S5000) (see Figures 44 and 50(4)), a variation start notification pattern such as SU notification, dialogue notification, button notification, or special sound notification is set as the variation start notification pattern in S5106 of the variation start notification processing (S5100) (see Figures 45 and 51), and a reach establishment notification pattern such as first character notification, second character notification, or group notification may be set as the reach establishment notification pattern in S5208 of the reach establishment notification processing (S5200) (see Figures 46 and 53(2) and (3)).

In this case, as shown in Figure 65, a timer animation begins when the variation animation starts, and this timer animation runs for approximately 10 seconds, indicating the remaining time until a reach is achieved. During the execution period of this timer animation, an SU animation, dialogue animation, button animation, or special sound animation (the special sound animation is limited to big win variations) is executed as a variation start-up notification (see Figure 65(1)). When the execution period of the timer animation (the remaining time displayed in the timer animation) has elapsed (when the timer display reaches 00:00), a first character animation, second character animation, or group animation is executed (see Figure 65(2)).

In this type of presentation, the expectation level suggested by the spin start notification, which is performed during the timer presentation, and the reach establishment notification, which is performed after the timer presentation has finished (after the time displayed in the timer presentation has elapsed), may be the same (for example, both are low expectation notifications), or the spin start notification may suggest a higher expectation level than the reach establishment notification, or vice versa (for example, one is a medium expectation notification and the other is a high expectation notification) (see Figures 51, 53(2), (3)). Also, when the timer presentation is performed, the display pattern of the timer presentation is set in S5014 of the timer presentation processing (S5000) (see Figures 44, 50(5)), and the expectation level is also suggested by that display pattern (in this embodiment, the color of the timer display). For this reason, the timer presentation, the spin start notification performed during the timer presentation, and the reach establishment notification performed after the timer presentation can each effectively heighten the player's expectation of a big win. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the following: the timer effect, the notification at the start of the variation that is performed during the timer effect, and the notification at the time a winning combination is achieved after the timer effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a special reel variation pattern (P1, P2, P4, or P5) with a variation time of 75,000 ms is executed, the variation effect (SP Reach variation effect) may include a timer effect, a variation start notification, a reach establishment notification, an SP development notification, and an operation instruction effect (first operation instruction effect or second operation instruction effect). The variation notifications, such as the timer effect, variation start notification, reach establishment notification, and SP development notification, suggest the likelihood of a big win, while the operation instruction effect (first operation instruction effect or second operation instruction effect) suggests the likelihood of a probability variation (high probability state) if a big win occurs. Therefore, the execution status of each of these effects can effectively heighten the player's anticipation for a big win or a probability variation (high probability state). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the timer effect, variation start notification, reach establishment notification, SP development notification, and operation instruction effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Here, the microcontroller 91 for controlling the performance, which executes the aforementioned fluctuation start notification process (S5100), reach establishment notification process (S5200), and SP development notification process (S5300), functions as a "suggestive performance execution means," a "first suggestive performance execution means," a "second suggestive performance execution means," and a "special suggestive performance execution means."

The above describes an embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the configuration shown below can also be adopted. The above-described embodiment and the configuration (modified example) shown below can be combined as appropriate, within the bounds of consistency.

In the above-described embodiment, a button notification was provided using the first performance button 63a as a notification at the start of a variation. However, button notifications may also be provided using the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b as a notification when a reach is established or when an SP develops.

In the previously described embodiment, the button notification included a low-expectancy mode A that displays an image 906 showing the words "Fight!" based on the operation of the first performance button 63a, a medium-expectancy mode B that displays an image 907 showing the words "Chance!" based on the operation of the first performance button 63a, and a high-expectancy mode C that displays an image 908 showing the words "Hot!!" based on the operation of the first performance button 63a (see Figures 51, 52, 62, etc.). In contrast, a jackpot-confirming mode button notification (special suggestion effect) may be provided that displays, for example, an image showing the letter "V" (also called a "jackpot confirmation suggestion image" or "special suggestion image") based on the operation of the first performance button 63a.

In the above-described embodiment, a jackpot confirmation notice (special suggestion effect) was provided as a notification at the start of the variation, suggesting that the game would be controlled to a jackpot state (special game state). However, a jackpot confirmation notice (special suggestion effect) may also be provided as a notification when a reach is established or when an SP development occurs (second suggestion effect).

Here, in one variation sequence (variation period), if a guaranteed jackpot announcement is not executed as a notification at the start of the variation (a special suggestion sequence is not executed at the first predetermined time), a guaranteed jackpot announcement may be executed as a notification when a reach is established (a special suggestion sequence is executed at the second predetermined time). Conversely, if a guaranteed jackpot announcement is executed as a notification at the start of the variation (a special suggestion sequence is executed at the first predetermined time), a guaranteed jackpot announcement may not be executed as a notification when a reach is established (a special suggestion sequence is not executed at the second predetermined time). In other words, if a guaranteed jackpot announcement pattern is not set in S5106 of the notification processing at the start of the variation (S5100), a guaranteed jackpot announcement pattern may be set in S5208 of the notification processing when a reach is established (S5200). Conversely, if a guaranteed jackpot announcement pattern is set in S5106, the system can be configured not to set a guaranteed jackpot announcement pattern in S5208.

With this configuration, if a jackpot confirmation notice is executed as a notification when a reach is established, the jackpot confirmation notice will not be executed as a notification at the start of the spin before the reach is established. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the same sense of excitement as when a jackpot confirmation notice is executed when a reach is established, without diminishing the effect of the jackpot confirmation notice as a notification when a reach is established.

Furthermore, in such a configuration, if the aforementioned button notification (special suggestion effect) that guarantees a jackpot is provided as a notification at the start of a variation, and the jackpot confirmation notification (special suggestion effect) is executed as a notification when a reach is established, the button notification that guarantees a jackpot will not be executed as a notification at the start of a variation. In other words, if a button notification is executed as a notification at the start of a variation, and a jackpot confirmation notification is executed as a notification when a reach is established, the button notification at the start of a variation will be a button notification other than the jackpot confirmation effect (for example, one of the aforementioned button notifications A to C). And, if one of the aforementioned button notifications A to C is executed as a notification at the start of a variation, when an image suggesting the expected value (suggestion image) is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button related to that button notification, that is, at the operation response time corresponding to when the effect button is operated, the jackpot confirmation suggestion image will not be displayed (i.e., the jackpot confirmation notification will not be executed), and the jackpot confirmation notification will be executed when a reach is established after the execution time of the button notification (the operation response time corresponding to when the effect button is operated).

In this way, even if a jackpot confirmation image is not displayed in response to the button press at the start of a variation (i.e., the jackpot confirmation announcement is not executed), by configuring the system so that the jackpot confirmation announcement can be executed when a reach is achieved, it becomes possible to give the player the excitement of the jackpot confirmation announcement being executed later than the timing of the button press (operation response period).

This section describes a configuration that allows for the execution of a jackpot confirmation notice as a reach-establishment notice. The same applies to a configuration that allows for the execution of a jackpot confirmation notice as an SP development notice. That is, in a single reel spin (spin period), if a jackpot confirmation notice is not executed as a spin start notice (at the first predetermined time), a jackpot confirmation notice may be executed as an SP development notice (at the second predetermined time). Conversely, if a jackpot confirmation notice is executed as a spin start notice (at the first predetermined time), the system can be configured not to execute a jackpot confirmation notice as an SP development notice (at the second predetermined time). This also produces the same effect as the case described above where a jackpot confirmation notice is executed as a reach-establishment notice.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned embodiment, the pre-determination based on the ball entering the starting position was performed by reading the latest acquired random value (acquired information) stored in the special symbol hold memory unit and performing a determination (pre-determination) on the read acquired random value (acquired information). However, the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special symbol hold memory unit, a region (acquired information storage means) for storing acquired information subject to pre-determination (i.e., acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the starting position) may be provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or sub-control unit 90, and the acquired information stored in this storage region (pre-determination storage unit) may be determined (pre-determination). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or sub-control unit 90, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the pre-determination (acquired information stored in a different storage region).

Furthermore, in the aforementioned embodiment, the control process prioritizes the consumption of the second special symbol hold over the first special symbol hold, a so-called special symbol 2 priority consumption control process. However, the control process is not limited to this; it may also prioritize the consumption of the first special symbol hold over the second special symbol hold, a so-called special symbol 1 priority consumption control process. Alternatively, no priority may be set between the consumption of the first and second special symbol hold, and the control process may be to consume them in the order they were oldest stored, a so-called ball entry order (stored order) consumption control process. Finally, the control process may allow for the consumption of the first and second special symbol hold to be executed in parallel.

Furthermore, while the above-described embodiment illustrates the application of the present invention to a type of pachinko game machine that determines whether or not to activate the probability variation function based on the type of winning symbol, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a type of pachinko game machine (so-called "V-probability machine") that has a specific area (V-area) as a probability variation activation opening in the large prize slot (V-attacker), and determines whether or not to activate the probability variation function based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area (V-pass) during a winning game. Alternatively, the present invention can also be applied to a type of pachinko game machine (so-called "Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine") that has a specific area (V-area) in the large prize slot that becomes accessible when the result of the special symbol hit/fail judgment is a minor win, and when a game ball that enters that large prize slot during a minor win game passes through the specific area (V-pass), a jackpot is achieved, and the jackpot game is executed based on the V-pass. Furthermore, this invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that circulate game balls within the machine (so-called "sealed-type game machines").

Furthermore, in the aforementioned embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot could be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating or deactivating the probability variation function. However, the types (number) of jackpot probabilities are not limited to these. For example, it may be possible to set three or more probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than the low probability (first probability) and lower than the high probability (second probability). Moreover, multiple probability conditions defining the relationship between low and high probabilities, such as a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), and a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), may be provided, and any of these multiple probability conditions may be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on.

[others]
The following inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed herein are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can control the game into a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by displaying changing identification information (e.g., special symbols). In some of these gaming machines, various effects, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of being controlled into a special game state, are performed while the identification information is being displayed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-000417).

The visual effects performed during the display of fluctuating identification information play an important role in enhancing the enjoyment of the game; however, there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

This Reference Invention 1 was made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of gaming.

To solve the aforementioned problems, this Reference Invention 1 employs the following means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information and can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
During the fluctuation period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display, a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that indicates the expected level of control to the special game state,
It comprises a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the elapsed of a predetermined period,
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing any of a plurality of first suggestive performances, each having a different form depending on the level of expectation, at a first predetermined time within the variation period, and is capable of executing any of a plurality of second suggestive performances, each having a different form depending on the level of expectation, at a second predetermined time within the variation period that is later than the first predetermined time.
If, at the first predetermined time, a first suggestive performance corresponding to an expectation level higher than the predetermined expectation level is performed, the system is configured such that, at the second predetermined time, the performance of a second suggestive performance corresponding to an expectation level lower than the predetermined expectation level is suppressed.
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of executing the period performance at any of the execution times among a plurality of execution times during the variable period.
The gist of the configuration is that the proportion of the period-specific performance being executed during a particular execution period among the multiple execution periods differs depending on whether or not the system is controlled to the special game state.

In such a gaming machine, during the fluctuation period from the start to the end of the display of fluctuating identification information, a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect that indicate the expected value of being controlled to a special game state (hereinafter also simply referred to as "expected value"), and a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period are made executable at their respective timings. The timing at which the first suggestion effect is executed (first predetermined time) is earlier than the timing at which the second suggestion effect is executed (second predetermined time). If the first suggestion effect corresponding to an expected value higher than the predetermined expected value (high expected value first suggestion effect) is executed, it becomes less likely that the second suggestion effect corresponding to an expected value lower than the predetermined expected value (low expected value second suggestion effect) will be executed after the first suggestion effect (the execution of the low expected value second suggestion effect is suppressed). In addition, there are multiple timings (execution times) at which the period effect is made executable, and the proportion at which the period effect is executed at a specific timing (specific execution time) among these multiple timings (execution times) differs depending on whether or not the game is controlled to a special game state. Therefore, by carefully controlling the nature of the suggestive effects and the timing of the period-based effects, it becomes possible to effectively heighten the player's anticipation for the special game state. This, in turn, makes it possible to attract the player's interest to each of the suggestive and period-based effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
Prior to the execution of the aforementioned period-based performance, the system includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in any of a plurality of modes,
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of executing the period performance after the execution of the specific performance,
The gist of this is that the proportion of the period-based performances performed differs depending on the manner in which the specific performance is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, when a specific animation is performed, a period-based animation may be performed afterward. The frequency of the period-based animation being performed varies depending on the nature of the preceding specific animation. Therefore, the specific animation functions as a suggestion regarding the execution of the period-based animation. This makes it possible to attract players' interest in the nature of the specific animation and whether or not the period-based animation is performed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
The gist of the above-mentioned specific performance execution means is that it can execute the specific performance even if the period performance is not executed.

With this type of gaming machine, specific effects can be executed even when period-specific effects are not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the execution of specific effects. This helps to suppress a decrease in the effectiveness of the effects.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 described above,
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player,
The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a special suggestion performance as a second suggestion performance, which suggests that the game is controlled to the special game state.
The gist of the configuration is that the special suggestion animation is not executed during the operation response period corresponding to when the operation means is operated, but may be executed at a later time than the operation response period.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 mentioned above,
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player,
The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a special suggestion performance as a second suggestion performance, which suggests that the game is controlled to the special game state.
The gist of the configuration is that the special suggestion animation is not executed during the operation response period corresponding to when the operation means is operated, but may be executed at a later time than the operation response period.

In this type of gaming machine, a special suggestion animation can be executed as a second suggestion animation during the variation period, following the first suggestion animation. This special suggestion animation suggests that the game will be controlled to a special game state. The special suggestion animation is not executed at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the control device, but may be executed at a later time. Therefore, even if the special suggestion animation is not executed in response to the operation of the control device, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the subsequent execution of the special suggestion animation (i.e., the special game state). This makes it possible to give the player a sense of excitement when the special suggestion animation is executed later than the timing of the operation of the control device (operation response time).

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 1, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of gaming.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can control the game into a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by displaying changing identification information (e.g., special symbols). In some of these gaming machines, various effects, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of being controlled into a special game state, are performed while the identification information is being displayed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-000417).

The visual effects performed during the display of fluctuating identification information play an important role in enhancing the enjoyment of the game; however, there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Reference Invention 2 was made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

To solve the aforementioned problems, this Reference Invention 2 employs the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information and can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests the expected value of being controlled to the special game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected level of control over the special game state,
It comprises a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the elapsed of a predetermined period,
The first suggestive performance execution means can execute the first suggestive performance at different rates depending on whether the period performance is in progress or not.
The second suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion performance after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed,
If the first suggestion performance is performed during the execution of the period performance and the second suggestion performance is performed after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed, the expected value suggested by one of the first or second suggestion performances may be higher than the expected value suggested by the other suggestion performance.
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of executing the period performance in any of the multiple display modes,
The gist of the configuration is that the proportion of the period-specific performance being executed in a particular display mode among the multiple display modes differs depending on whether or not the game is controlled to the special game state.

In such a gaming machine, in the display of changing identification information, a first suggestion effect that indicates the expected value of being controlled to a special game state (hereinafter also simply referred to as "expected value") can be executed at a different rate depending on whether or not a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period is being executed. In addition, in the display of changing identification information, a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected value can be executed separately from the first suggestion effect after the predetermined period displayed in the period effect has elapsed. When the first suggestion effect is executed while the period effect is being executed, and the second suggestion effect is executed after the predetermined period displayed in that period effect has elapsed, that is, when both the first and second suggestion effects are executed in conjunction with the period effect, the first suggestion effect may be a suggestion effect with a higher expected value than the second suggestion effect, or the second suggestion effect may be a suggestion effect with a higher expected value than the first suggestion effect. Furthermore, there are multiple display modes for the period effect, and the rate at which the period effect is executed in a particular display mode among these multiple display modes is configured to differ depending on whether or not it is controlled to a special game state. Therefore, the execution status of each of the period-based, first-suggestion, and second-suggestion effects can effectively heighten the player's anticipation for the special game state. This, in turn, can attract the player's interest in each of the period-based, first-suggestion, and second-suggestion effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is,
A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information and can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests the expected value of being controlled to the special game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected level of control over the special game state,
The system includes a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period over the said predetermined period,
The first suggestive performance execution means can execute the first suggestive performance at different rates depending on whether the period performance is in progress or not.
The second suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion performance after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed,
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of performing the period performance over any of the predetermined periods among a plurality of predetermined periods.
The system is configured such that the execution rate of the first suggestion animation differs depending on whether the period animation is executed over a first predetermined period among the plurality of predetermined periods, or over a second predetermined period that is longer than the first predetermined period.
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of executing the period performance in any of the multiple display modes,
The gist of the configuration is that the proportion of the period-specific performance being executed in a predetermined display mode among the multiple display modes differs depending on whether or not the game is controlled to the special game state.

In this type of gaming machine, the first suggestion animation, which indicates the level of expectation, can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a period animation, which displays the passage of a predetermined period, is currently running. Furthermore, in the display of changing identification information, a second suggestion animation, which also indicates the level of expectation, can be executed separately from the first suggestion animation, after the predetermined period displayed by the period animation has elapsed. The execution rate of the first suggestion animation differs depending on whether the period animation is executed over a first predetermined period or over a second predetermined period that is longer than the first. Additionally, there are multiple display modes for the period animation, and the execution rate of the period animation in a specific display mode differs depending on whether or not the game is controlled to enter a special game state. Therefore, the execution status of each of the period animation, the first suggestion animation, and the second suggestion animation can effectively heighten the player's anticipation for the special game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the period animation, the first suggestion animation, and the second suggestion animation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above,
Prior to the execution of the aforementioned period-based performance, the system includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in any of a plurality of modes,
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of executing the period performance after the execution of the specific performance,
The gist of this is that the proportion of the period-based performances performed differs depending on the manner in which the specific performance is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, a period-based event becomes available after a specific event is performed, and the rate at which the period-based event is performed varies depending on the nature of the specific event performed earlier. Therefore, the specific event functions as a suggestion regarding the execution of the period-based event. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the nature of the specific event and whether or not the period-based event is performed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The gist of the above-mentioned specific performance execution means is that it can execute the specific performance even if the period performance is not executed.

With this type of gaming machine, specific effects can be executed even when period-specific effects are not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the execution of specific effects. This helps to suppress a decrease in the effectiveness of the effects.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 2, it is possible to improve technical interest.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that display changing identification information (e.g., special symbols), and when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner (e.g., a jackpot manner), they can be controlled to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. In this type of gaming machine, various effects, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of being controlled to a special game state, are executed while the identification information is displayed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-000417).

The visual effects performed during the display of fluctuating identification information play an important role in enhancing the enjoyment of the game; however, there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Reference Invention 3 was made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of gaming.

To solve the aforementioned problems, this reference invention 3 employs the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information and, when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner, can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state in which the aforementioned variable display is made possible to at least a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests the expected value of being controlled to the special game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected level of control over the special game state,
The aforementioned variable display includes a first operation instruction execution means capable of executing a first operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation,
The aforementioned variable display includes a second operation instruction execution means capable of executing a second operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation,
It comprises a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the elapsed of a predetermined period,
The first suggestive performance execution means can execute the first suggestive performance at different rates depending on whether the period performance is in progress or not.
The second suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion performance after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed,
If the first suggestion performance is performed during the execution of the period performance and the second suggestion performance is performed after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed, the expected value suggested by one of the first or second suggestion performances may be higher than the expected value suggested by the other suggestion performance.
The gist of the configuration is that the proportion to which the second game state is controlled differs depending on whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the first operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display, or whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the second operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display.

In such a gaming machine, in the display of changing identification information, a first suggestion effect that indicates the expected value (hereinafter simply referred to as "expected value") controlled to a special game state can be executed at a different rate depending on whether or not a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period is being executed. In addition, in the display of changing identification information, a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected value can be executed separately from the first suggestion effect after the predetermined period displayed in the period effect has elapsed. Furthermore, in the display of changing identification information, a first operation instruction effect that instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation and a second operation instruction effect that instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation can be executed. When the first suggestion effect is executed while the period effect is being executed, and the second suggestion effect is executed after the predetermined period displayed in that period effect has elapsed, that is, when both the first and second suggestion effects are executed in conjunction with the period effect, the first suggestion effect may be a suggestion effect with a higher expected value than the second suggestion effect, or the second suggestion effect may be a suggestion effect with a higher expected value than the first suggestion effect. Furthermore, while the game state in which the display of changing identification information is possible can be controlled to at least one state (first game state) or one state (second game state) which is more advantageous than the first game state, the display of changing identification information is configured such that the proportion of control to the second game state differs depending on whether the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the first operation instruction performance or after the second operation instruction performance is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation for special game states and second game states based on the execution status of each performance: the period performance, the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance, and the operation instruction performance. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to each performance—the period performance, the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance, and the operation instruction performance—and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is,
A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information and, when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner, can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state in which the aforementioned variable display is made possible to at least a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests the expected value of being controlled to the special game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected level of control over the special game state,
The aforementioned variable display includes a first operation instruction execution means capable of executing a first operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation,
The aforementioned variable display includes a second operation instruction execution means capable of executing a second operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation,
The system includes a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period over the said predetermined period,
The first suggestive performance execution means can execute the first suggestive performance at different rates depending on whether the period performance is in progress or not.
The second suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion performance after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed,
The aforementioned period performance execution means is capable of performing the period performance over any of the predetermined periods among a plurality of predetermined periods.
The system is configured such that the execution rate of the first suggestion animation differs depending on whether the period animation is executed over a first predetermined period among the plurality of predetermined periods, or over a second predetermined period that is longer than the first predetermined period.
The gist of the configuration is that the proportion to which the second game state is controlled differs depending on whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the first operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display, or whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the second operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display.

In such a gaming machine, the display of changing identification information allows for the execution of a first suggestion effect, which indicates the degree of expectation, at a different rate depending on whether or not a period effect, which displays the passage of a predetermined period, is currently running. Furthermore, in the display of changing identification information, a second suggestion effect, which also indicates the degree of expectation, is available separately from the first suggestion effect, after the predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed. Additionally, in the display of changing identification information, a first operation instruction effect, which instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation, and a second operation instruction effect, which instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation, are available. The execution rate of the first suggestion effect differs depending on whether the period effect is executed over a first predetermined period or over a second predetermined period that is longer than the first predetermined period. Furthermore, while the game state in which the display of changing identification information is possible can be controlled to at least one state (first game state) or one state (second game state) which is more advantageous than the first game state, the display of changing identification information is configured such that the proportion of control to the second game state differs depending on whether the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the first operation instruction performance or after the second operation instruction performance is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation for special game states and second game states based on the execution status of each performance: the period performance, the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance, and the operation instruction performance. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to each performance—the period performance, the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance, and the operation instruction performance—and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above,
The gist of this is that the execution of the second operation instruction performance is restricted during at least one of a predetermined pre-execution period before the first operation instruction performance is executed and a predetermined post-execution period after the first operation instruction performance is executed, as well as during the period in which the first operation instruction performance is executed.

In this type of gaming machine, the execution of the second operation instruction animation is restricted during either a predetermined pre-execution period or a predetermined post-execution period, or both. Furthermore, the execution of the second operation instruction animation is also restricted during the period in which the first operation instruction animation is performed. Therefore, the effect of the first predetermined operation (the effect of the first operation instruction animation) is less likely to be impaired. This makes it easier for players to experience the effect of the first predetermined operation.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 3, it is possible to improve technical interest.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game area, 4 Rail member, 7 Image display device, 7a Display screen, 7b Performance symbol display area, 7c Judgment symbol display area, 8 Performance symbol, 8s Judgment symbol, 9a First performance hold, 9b Second performance hold, 9c First performance hold display area, 9d Second performance hold display area, 9e Variable hold display area, 10 Center decoration, 13 Decoration member, 14 Movable performance member, 15 Movable lamp, 16 Game nails, 19 Fixed prize entry device, 20 First start opening, 21 Second start opening, 22 Variable prize entry device, 28 Gate, 30 Large prize opening, 31 Large prize entry device, 40 Main display unit, 41a First special symbol display unit, 41b Second special symbol display unit, 50 Game machine frame, 51 Front frame, 52 Main body frame, 53 Outer frame, 60 Launch handle, 63a First effect button, 63b Second effect button, 66 Frame lamp, 67 Speaker, 80 Main control board, 81 Microcontroller for game control, 90 Sub-control board, 91 Microcontroller for effect control, 100 Image control board, 101 Microcontroller for image control, 106 Audio control board, 107 Lamp control board, 901-912 Effects images.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays changes in identification information based on acquired information obtained when predetermined acquisition conditions are met , and can control the game to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state in which the aforementioned variable display is made possible to at least a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests the expected value of being controlled to the special game state,
The aforementioned fluctuation display includes a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that indicates the expected level of control over the special game state,
The aforementioned variable display includes a first operation instruction execution means capable of executing a first operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation,
The aforementioned variable display includes a second operation instruction execution means capable of executing a second operation instruction performance that instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation,
A period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the elapsed time of a predetermined period,
A storage means capable of storing the acquired information as reserved information,
A storage display means capable of displaying a storage display according to the reserved information stored in the storage means,
The system includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that causes the aforementioned memory display to be displayed in a display manner different from the normal one,
The first suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the first suggestive performance in such a way that the execution rate differs depending on whether the period performance is executed or not.
The second suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion performance after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed,
When the first suggestion performance is performed together with the period performance , and the second suggestion performance is performed after the predetermined period displayed in the period performance has elapsed, the expected value suggested by one of the first or second suggestion performances may be higher than the expected value suggested by the other suggestion performance.
The system is configured such that the proportion of control to the second game state differs depending on whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the first operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display, or whether the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the second operation instruction performance is executed in the variable display .
When the memory display is displayed in a special display mode as a result of the execution of the specified performance, the period performance is configured to be executable in the variable display based on the held information corresponding to the memory display displayed in the special display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.